Carrier 30XV160, 30XV225, 30XV275, 30XV300, 30XV250 Controls, Start-up, Operation, Service And Troubleshooting Instructions

...
Page 1
Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service
and Troubleshooting

CONTENTS

Page
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,3
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3,4
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Touch Pilot™ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
• WELCOME SCREEN
• HOME SCREEN
• STATUS MESSAGE BOX
• TOUCH PILOT LOGIN AND DISPLAY SETUP
• MAIN MENU SCREEN
• GENERAL CONFIGURATION TABLE
• TRENDINGS SCREEN
• MENU ARCHITECTURE
• SETTING TIME AND DATE
• WEB AND NETWORK INTERFACE
Input/Output (SIOB) Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Auxiliary (AUX) Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch (SW1). . . . . . . 15
Emergency On/Off Switch (SW2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Energy Management Module (EMM). . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Local Equipment Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
•RED LED
• GREEN LED
Carrier Comfort Network
Remote Alarm and Alert Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CONFIGURATION (SOFTWARE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43
Touch Pilot Operation Configuration Tables . . . . 17
Touch Pilot Menu Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Machine Control Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
• OPERATING TYPE SELECTION
Machine On/Off Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
• MACHINE START DELAY
• FAST LOADING
Chilled Water Setpoint Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 22
• FLUID SETPOINT CONTROL LOCATION
• COOLING SETPOINT SELECTION
• DEFINING SET POINTS
• CURRENT OPERATING SETPOINT
• SETPOINT OCCUPANCY
• DEFINING OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE
• CHILLED WATER FLUID TYPE SELECTION
Evaporator Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
• PUMP SELECTION
• PERIODIC PUMP QUICK START
• MASTER/SLAVE CHILLER PUMP OPERATION
• CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH STATUS
• MANUAL OPERATION
®
(CCN) Interface . . . . . . 16
AquaForce
30XV140-325
Variable Speed Air-Cooled Liquid Chillers
with Greenspeed® Intelligence
™
and Touch Pilot
Circuit/Compressor Staging and Loading . . . . . . . 26
• CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR STAGING
• CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR LOADING/UNLOADING
Dual Chiller Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
• DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR PARALLEL APPLICATIONS
• DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR PARALLEL CHILLER APPLICATIONS
• DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR SERIES CHILLER APPLICATIONS
• DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR SERIES CHILLER APPLICATIONS
Ramp Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Temperature Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
• OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE RESET
• DELTA T RESET (RETURN WATER RESET)
• 4-20 mA TEMPERATURE RESET
• SPACE TEMPERATURE RESET
Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
• SWITCH CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT
• EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 to 20 mA) DEMAND LIMIT
• CCN LOADSHED CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT
Ice Storage Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Broadcast Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
• ACTIVATE
• OAT BROADCAST
• BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER
Alarm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
• ALARM ROUTING CONTROL
• ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY
• COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME
• RE-ALARM TIME
• ALARM SYSTEM NAME
Daylight Saving Time Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Capacity Control Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Head Pressure Control (Variable Speed Fans) . . 42
Head Pressure Control (Fixed Speed Fans) . . . . . 42
PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-46
Actual Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
• TEMPERATURES
• VOLTAGE
• MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME
• FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-52
Sequence of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• ACTUATED BALL VALVE (ABV)
Controls
Page
®
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Catalog No. 04-53300166-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30XV-1T Pg 1 4-17 Replaces: New
Page 2
CONTENTS (cont)
Page
Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• PUMP OPERATION
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• STARTUP DELAY IN EFFECT
• SECOND SETPOINT IN USE
• RESET IN EFFECT
• DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE
• EVAPORATOR PUMP ROTATION
• PUMP PERIODIC START
• MASTER SLAVE CONTROL ACTIVE
• ICE MODE IN EFFECT
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• THERMISTORS
• TRANSDUCERS
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-99
Economizer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
• MAIN EXV CONTROL
• ECONOMIZER EXV CONTROL
• EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Compressor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
• VI VALVE TROUBLESHOOTING
• SUCTION VICTAULIC COUPLING INSTALLATION
• COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM
Evaporator Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
• ISOLATION VALVE
• EVAPORATOR FREEZE PROTECTION
• LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE
• LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION
• TUBE PLUGGING
• EVAPORATOR RETUBING
• TIGHTENING EVAPORATOR HEAD BOLTS
• INSPECTING/CLEANING HEAT EXCHANGERS
• EVAPORATOR CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH
All Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
• EVAPORATOR WATER TREATMENT
• PREPARATION FOR WINTER SHUTDOWN
Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
RTPF Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
• REMOVE SURFACE LOADED FIBERS
• PERIODIC CLEAN WATER RINSE
• ROUTINE CLEANING OF RTPF COIL SURFACES
Condenser Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Refrigerant Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
• LEAK TESTING
• REFRIGERANT CHARGE
Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
• COMPRESSOR PROTECTION
• OIL SEPARATOR HEATERS
Relief Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
• COMPRESSOR DRIVES
• CONDENSER FAN DRIVES
• VFD DISPLAY NAVIGATION
• VFD STATUS
• VFD CONFIGURATION TABLES
• VFD ALARM RESET
• VFD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
• LONG TERM STORAGE
MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 100
Page
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-128
Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
• CURRENT ALARMS
• RESETTING ALARMS
• ALARM HISTORY
• VFD ALARMS AND ALERTS
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
• BLACK BOX FUNCTION
• TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Quick Test (Service Test). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™
DISPLAY TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129-149
APPENDIX B — CCN POINT TABLE. . . . . . . . . 150-155
APPENDIX C — LON POINT TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
APPENDIX D — BACNET/MODBUS
TRANSLATOR POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
APPENDIX E — PIPING AND
INSTRUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
APPENDIX F — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
AND LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 160
APPENDIX G — EVAPORATOR HEATER SENSOR SET POINT
APPENDIX H — TOUCH PILOT WEB AND
NETWORK INTERFACE PARAMETERS . . . . . 162-168
APPENDIX I — COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER FACTORY TRIP SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . 169
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
START-UP CHECKLIST
FOR 30XV LIQUID CHILLERS . . . . . . . .CL-1 to CL-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures, electrical compo­nents, and equipment location (roof, elevated structures, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service techni­cians should install, start up, and service this equipment. When working on this equipment, observe precautions in the literature, on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Fol­low all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in handling all electrical components.
WARNING
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation and ser­vice. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.
WARNING
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. After unit power is disconnected, wait at least 20 minutes for the VFD (variable frequency drive) capacitors to discharge before opening drive.
2
Page 3
WARNING
CAUTION
DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. Outlet from relief valves must be vented in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concen­trations of vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregulari­ties, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount of oxygen avail­able for breathing. Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.
WARNING
DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System contains oil and refrigerant under pressure.
To remove a component, wear protective gloves and gog­gles and proceed as follows:
a. Shut off electrical power to unit. b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from sys-
tem using both high-pressure and low pressure ports.
c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen and
the work area should be well ventilated. Refrigerant in contact with an open flame produces toxic gases.
d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter
and remove component from unit. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to the system.
e. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs when nec-
essary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame.
Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Standard Tier units (units with S in the 10th position of the model number) must have the condenser fan(s) rota­tion verified to ensure proper phasing. Correct rotation is counter-clockwise (reference arrow on fan hub). Swap any two incoming power leads to correct condenser fan rotation before starting chiller. Operating the unit with­out testing the condenser fan(s) for proper phasing could result in equipment damage.
This unit uses a microprocessor control system. Do not short or jumper between terminations on circuit boards or modules; control or board failure may result.
Be aware of electrostatic discharge (static electricity) when handling or making contact with circuit boards or module connections. Always touch a chassis (grounded) part to dis­sipate body electrostatic charge before working inside con­trol center.
Use extreme care when handling tools near boards and when connecting or disconnecting terminal plugs. Circuit boards can easily be damaged. Always hold boards by the edges and avoid touching components and connections.
This equipment uses, and can radiate, radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause interference to radio com­munications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Inter­national Standard in North America EN 61000-2/3 which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Always store and transport replacement or defective boards in anti-static shipping bag.
CAUTION
To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger tubes, always run fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing refrigerant charge. Use appropriate antifreeze solutions in evaporator fluid loop to prevent the freezing of heat exchanger or interconnecting piping when the equip­ment is exposed to temperatures below 32 F (0° C). Proof of flow switch is factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power from this chiller during winter shut down periods without taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger. Failure to properly protect the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may void warranty.
IMPORTANT: If the compressor VFD enclosure is removed for service, it must be reinstalled to protect the drive from water intrusion. Failure to reinstall the compressor VFD enclosure may constitute abuse and may void warranty.
CAUTION
DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been exposed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes and regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to air any longer than the actual time required to service the equipment. Seal circuits being serviced and charge with dry nitrogen to prevent oil contamination when timely repairs cannot be completed. Failure to follow these proce­dures may result in damage to equipment.

GENERAL

This publication contains Controls, Operation, Start-Up, Service and Troubleshooting information for the 30XV140­325 air-cooled liquid chillers with Greenspeed and electronic controls. See Table 1. The 30XV chillers are equipped with Touch Pilot™ controls, electronic expansion valves, and variable speed fans and compressors. The Aqua-
®
Force
30XV chillers with Greenspeed intelligence come
equipped with a 7-in. Touch Pilot™ display.
3
®
intelligence
Page 4
Table 1 — Unit Sizes
Fig. 1 — Welcome Screen
30XV ACG-SR-10A2AA010
Fig. 2 — Home Screen
UNIT NOMINAL CAPACITY (TONS) 30XV140 140 30XV160 160 30XV180 180 30XV200 200 30XV225 225 30XV250 250 30XV275 275 30XV300 300 30XV325 325
Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-
ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the Touch Pilot display will be used in this manual.
The menu items are shown in this document as they appear on the Touch Pilot display. A path name for each item will show the user how to navigate through the Touch Pilot display to reach the desired configuration. The arrow symbol () in the path name represents touching the menu item on the screen of the Touch Pilot
™
display. See Appendix A for a complete
list of Touch Pilot menu items and descriptions.
The CCN and BACnet* point names are shown in bold. See Appendix B for a list of CCN points, and Appendix D for a list of BACnet points.
Abbreviations Used in This Manual — The fol-
lowing abbreviations are used in this manual:
• ABV — Actuated ball valve
• AUX — Auxiliary (Board)
• BACnet — Building Automation and Controls Network.
Open Protocol for the controlled exchange of data between
two or more intelligent control devices or BMS. BACnet is
used over IP (Internet Protocol).
• CCN — Carrier Comfort Network
trolled exchange of data between two or more intelligent
PIC (Peripheral Interface Controller)/FID (Field Interface
Device) devices within the geographic confines of a single
building.
• CWFS — Chilled water flow switch
• DGT — Discharge gas temperature
• DPT — Discharge pressure
• EMM — Energy Management Module
• EWT — Entering water temperature
• HMI — Human Machine Interface
• LEN — Local Equipment Network. Protocol for the con-
trolled exchange of data between two or more intelligent
control devices within the geographic confines of a single
Carrier equipment installation.
• LPT — Liquid pressure transducer
• LWT — Leaving water temperature
• OAT — Outdoor air temperature
• SCT — Saturated condensing temperature
• SDT — Saturated discharge temperature
• SLT — Saturated liquid temperature
• SIOB — Standard Input/Output Board
• SM — System Manager
• SPT — Suction pressure transducer
• SST — Saturated suction temperature
®
. Protocol for the con-
Touch Pilot Display — The Touch Pilot module is the
core of the control system. It contains the major portion of operating software and controls the operation of the machine. See Web and Network Interface section on page 11.
The Touch Pilot module continuously monitors input/output channel information received from the SIOB and AUX boards. The Touch Pilot receives inputs from status and feedback switches, pressure transducers and thermistors. The Touch Pi­lot module, through the communications bus, also controls out­puts on the SIOB and AUX boards. All inputs and outputs that control the chiller are located on other boards. Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network).
The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network
®
) bus is also supported.
Connections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at ter­minal board TB3 located within the control box enclosure to the left of the Touch Pilot display.
Touch Pilot Display User Interface — The Touch
Pilot display is the standard user interface on all 30XV chillers with Greenspeed a large 7-in. LCD (liquid crystal display) touch screen for display and user configuration. A stylus is recommended for use on the touch screen. The stylus is included with the unit.
WELCOME SCREEN — The Welcome screen is the first screen shown after Touch Pilot starts. It displays the application name as well as the current software version number. See Fig. 1.
NOTE: If a communication failure occurs, the Touch Pilot Set­tings button is displayed (see the "Touch Pilot Display Port Connections" table on page 11 and the "Touch Pilot Display Interface and Connectors" figure on page 11 ).
To exit the Welcome screen, press the Home button . HOME SCREEN — The Home screen provides an overview
of system controls, allowing the user to monitor the vapor­refrigeration cycle. The screen indicates the current status of the unit, giving information on the unit capacity, refrigerant conditions, the status of the evaporator pumps, the active set point, and other information. See Fig. 2.
®
intelligence. The display includes

CONTROLS

The 30XV air-cooled liquid chillers contain the Touch Pilot™ electronic control system that controls and monitors all opera­tions of the chiller. The control system is composed of several components as listed in the following sections. All machines have a Touch Pilot module, Standard Input/Output (SIOB) boards, Emergency On/Off switch, and an Enable-Off-Remote Contact switch. Table 2 lists power schematics by unit size.
*BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers).
4
Page 5
Table 2 — Control and Power Drawings
UNIT DESCRIPTION LOCATION
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 71, page 118
30XV140
30XV160
30XV180
30XV200
30XV225
30XV250
30XV275
30XV300
30XV325
Power Wiring Schematic (Mid) Fig. 73, page 120
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 71, page 118
Power Wiring Schematic (Mid)
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 71, page 118
Power Wiring Schematic (Mid)
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 71, page 118
Power Wiring Schematic (Mid)
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 71, page 118 Power Wiring Schematic (Mid) Fig. 73, page 120
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 71, page 118 Power Wiring Schematic (Mid) Fig. 73, page 120
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 71, page 118 Power Wiring Schematic (Mid) Fig. 73, page 120
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 72, page 119
Power Wiring Schematic (Mid)
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Typical Field Connections Wiring Schematic Fig. 70, page 117
Power Wiring Schematic (Std) Fig. 72, page 119
Power Wiring Schematic (Mid)
Power Wiring Schematic (High)
Communication Wiring Fig. 78, page 125
Control Wiring Schematics Fig. 79-81, pages 126-128
Fig. 74, page 121 Fig. 75, page 122
Fig. 73, page 120 Fig. 75, page 122
Fig. 74, page 121 Fig. 75, page 122
Fig. 73, page 120 Fig. 75, page 122
Fig. 74, page 121 Fig. 75, page 122
Fig. 73, page 120 Fig. 75, page 122
Fig. 74, page 121 Fig. 75, page 122
Fig. 76, page 123 Fig. 77, page 124
Fig. 76, page 123 Fig. 77, page 124
Fig. 76, page 123 Fig. 77, page 124
Fig. 76, page 123 Fig. 77, page 124
Fig. 76, page 123 Fig. 77, page 124
Fig. 76, page 123 Fig. 77, page 124
Fig. 76, page 123 Fig. 77, page 124
5
Page 6
To display the SDT and SST for each circuit select the i. See
LEGEND
1—Unit capacity percentage 2—Unit status 3—Evaporator inlet and outlet water temperature 4—Pump status (if configured) 5—Active setpoint 6—SDT/SST (Ckt. A on LEFT, Ckt. B on RIGHT) 7—Outdoor air temperature
Fig. 3 — Home Screen with SDT/SST
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
Fig. 3.
Table 3 — Screen Buttons
BUTTON FUNCTION
TOP LEFT PANEL — GENERAL NAVIGATION
The following buttons appear on the top panel of the home screen. See Table 3 for more general screen buttons.
Main Menu — Press the Main Menu button to access all unit functions. See Main Menu Screen on page 8 for details.
Log In — Press to enter passwords and select lan­guage or change the system of measurement. See page 8 for login details.
Start/Stop — Press to access the chiller operating modes menu. See page 20 for details on available operating modes.
Alarm — The alarm icon turns solid or blinks red when a fault is detected. See page 100 for details on system alarms and alerts.
STATUS MESSAGE BOX — Messages may be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen relevant to the cur­rent user action. See Table 4.
Home button: Goes back to the home screen. Button is disabled at power up, until the initialization is complete.
Main Menu button: Goes to the Main Menu screen from the Home screen. Allows access to unit menus and parameters. See page 8.
Back button: Goes to previous screen.
HMI Settings: Goes to the Touch Pilot settings. Button appears in the Welcome screen only when a communication fail­ure occurs, to provide the user a chance to fix the problem.
TOP RIGHT PANEL — SPECIAL NAVIGATION
and
BOTTOM LEFT PANEL — ACTIONS SPECIFIC TO CURRENT SCREEN OPERATION
BOTTOM RIGHT PANEL — SCROLLING INSIDE CURRENT SCREEN
Login button: Goes to the User Login screen, where the user can select a display language and system of measurement, and log in. See page 8. Icon shows a closed lock when the user is not logged in, and an opened lock when the user is logged in.
Start / Stop button: Goes to the chiller start / stop screen. The icon can be gray, green, or blinking between gray and green. See the Machine Control Methods section on page 20.
Alarm button: Goes to the alarm menu screen.The icon can be gray, red, or blinking between gray and red. See the Alarms and Alerts section on page 100.
User Login screen: Login / Logout. Login button (green check mark) validates the currently entered user level (Basic, User, Service Or Factory), and jumps back to the previous screen. Logout button (red X) resets the user level and jumps to the Welcome screen.
Save/Cancel: Save button (disc icon) confirms changes. Cancel (red X) discards changes.
Force Screen: Set Force/Remove Force. Set Force button sends a CCN Force command to the point. Remove Force (AUTO) button sends a CCN Auto command to the point.
Up and Down arrows: Scroll within screen content. A page indicator shows what page is being viewed, and the total number of pages.
6
Page 7
Table 4 — Status Messages
MESSAGE STATUS
COMMUNICATION FAILURE! Equipment controller did not respond while reading the table content.
ACCESS DENIED!
LIMIT EXCEEDED! The value entered exceeds the parameter limit.
COMMAND ACCEPTED Force or Auto command was accepted by the Equipment Controller.
HIGHER FORCE IN EFFECT! Equipment controller rejects Force or Auto command.
Save changes? Modifications have been made. The exit must be confirmed by pressing Save or Cancel.
Invalid password! Entered password is not valid
Log level = basic Entered password is 0 = basic, login is allowed
Log level = User Entered password corresponds to the User password, login is allowed
Log level = Service Entered password corresponds to the Service password, login is allowed
Log level = Factory Entered password corresponds to the Factory password, login is allowed
PLEASE LOGIN Login required before accessing start/stop function
Select Machine Mode Default prompt when entering the Start/Stop screen.
Machine Status Application status message (see somewhere else)
Loading Data … Trend Manager is not ready yet.
TRENDING FIRMWARE MODULE ERROR!
BACNET FIRMWARE MODULE NOT FOUND!
Equipment controller denies access to one of the tables. See Touch Pilot Login and Display Setup, page 8.
Trend Manager detected a problem during its initialization sequence (file access or file content problem) and cannot display Trend/Log data.
BACNet module is not responding (its web server is not functional, or the whole module failed to start).
Too Many users connected! Please try again later … Maximum of 2 concurrent web server connections allowed.
Application Firmware must be downloaded!
The software detected a conflict between the version of the web server web pages, and the HMI application firmware.
7
Page 8
™
LEGEND
1—Arrows indicate selected language 2—Login button (confirm changes) 3—Logout button (cancel changes) 4—System of measurement selection 5—Password dialog box
Fig. 4 — User Login Screen
1
2
3 5
4
a30-5914
PRESS TO NAVIGATE THROUGH MENUS OR TABLES
Fig. 5 — Main Menu
Fig. 6 — General Parameters, Page 1
TOUCH PILOT
LOGIN AND DISPLAY SETUP — Certain control functions and navigation menus are password protected. There are multiple levels of user access on the Touch Pilot display, each with independent password protec­tion:
• Basic — At initial start-up and after a timeout period, the
access type defaults to All. In this mode the user can view system operating conditions, and select the set point only.
• User — The User access level authorizes access to mod-
ify the Setpoint Table and some Configuration Menu parameters, as well as access to all menus accessible with the Basic mode. The default password for User level access is 11. To change the User access password, go to Main Menu Configuration Menu User Con­figuration, then enter the new password and press the Save button.
• Service — The Service access level authorizes access to
all menus and parameters needed for operation and service of the machine, including Quick Test and Maintenance Menus as well as additional Configuration Menus. The default password for Service level access is 88. To change the Service access password, go to Main Menu Config­uration Menu Service Parameters, then scroll to the password entry area. Enter the new password and press the Save button.
• Factory — The Factory access level authorizes access to
all menus and parameters for the unit, including factory settings. The default password for Factory level access is
113. To change the Factory access password, go to Main Menu Configuration Menu Factory Menu, then scroll to the password entry area. Enter the new pass­word and press the Save button.
To log in to the Touch Pilot display, press the Login button
on the Main Menu or the Home screen and input the required password on the User Login screen. Then press the Login button on the User Login screen. See Fig. 4.
Changing the Units of Measurement
— The User Login Screen (Fig. 4) offers 2 choices for units of measurement: US Imperial or Metric. The factory default is US Imperial. To change the measurement system, select the appropriate system on the User Login screen.
MAIN MENU SCREEN — The Main Menu provides access to the main control parameters, including general parameters, temperatures and pressures, inputs and outputs status, and oth­ers. Press the Main Menu button on the Home screen to access the Main Menu.
Figure 5 shows the first page of the Main Menu. To navi­gate through the pages, press the arrows at the lower right cor­ner of the screen.
To view or modify system parameters, press the appropriate icon on the Main Menu. For example, to access the General Pa­rameters table, press the General Parameters button .
Figure 6 shows the first page of the General Parameters ta­ble. Use the arrows at the bottom right corner to navigate the General Parameters table.
Changing the Touch Pilot Display Language Login Screen (Fig. 4) offers 2 language selections for the Touch Pilot Display: English or Spanish. The factory default language is English. To change the display language, simply select the language icon on the User Login screen.
— The User
Points that can be changed with the current level of user ac­cess are outlined by a box. For example, to modify the set point parameter, select the current set point as shown in Fig. 6 and enter the desired parameter.
The data entry screen will be displayed (Fig. 7). Use the graphic “keyboard” to modify the parameter, then press OK to save or EXIT to cancel the modifications.
8
Page 9
Since Setpoint Select (Fig. 6) is a forcible point (the op-
a30-5911
Fig. 7 — Data Entry Screen
Fig. 8 — Force Variable Screen
Fig. 9 — General Configuration, Page 1
LEGEND
1— Save 2— Cancel 3— Previous page 4— Next page
1 2 3 4
a30-5908
Fig. 10 — Trendings Screen, Page 1
Fig. 11 — Trendings Screen, Page 2
erator is able to manually override the auto function), the Force Variable screen will be displayed. See Fig. 8. The Force Variable screen provides the option to override the current operation of the unit.
TRENDINGS SCREEN — The Trendings screen allows for easy monitoring of parameters selected by the user. To access the Trendings screen, select Trendings on the Main Menu. See Fig. 10.
Select the parameters to be displayed by selecting the box to the left of the parameter name, then press save. Press the up/ down page buttons to see the graph showing the perfor­mance of the unit during a selected period of time. See Fig. 11.
Enter the forced value, then press to set the forced
point or to remove it (return to Auto). GENERAL CONFIGURATION TABLE — This table con-
tains configuration settings for the unit. Select Main Menu Configuration Menu General Configuration to access the ta­ble (Fig. 9).
Press the field corresponding to the parameter to be modi­fied and make the necessary changes. When all necessary changes have been made, press the Save button to confirm or the Cancel button to cancel changes. For a complete list of general parameters, see Appendix A.
a30-5909
Use the following buttons to adjust the Trendings display:
Press to adjust time and date settings for the dis­play. See Fig. 11. Select the time/date boxes and use graphic keyboard to modify time/date; then select the to save your entries.
Navigate across the time line.
Go to beginning or end of selected period.
Zoom in to magnify the view.
Zoom out to expand the viewed area.
Refresh (reload) data.
MENU ARCHITECTURE — See Fig. 12-14 for Touch Pi­lot™ menu structure. The options displayed depend on the us­er’s access level as shown in the figures. The user can navigate through the Touch Pilot display screens by selecting the but­tons that appear on the screen. When a button is selected, either a submenu or a list of parameters and values will be shown.
If the list of point names and values are shown, the top line of the display is the table name. Selecting an item will cause a Point Data dialog box to appear. For a complete list of tables and points with display names and CCN point names, see Ap­pendix A.
9
Page 10
Fig. 12 — Main Menu and Alarm Menu Structure
HOME
MAIN MENU LOG IN/LOG OUT CONFIRM STOP CHOOSE OPERATING MODE ALARM MENU
GENERAL PARAMETERS
CONFIGURATION MENU
1
1
1
2
TEMPERATURES
OUTPUTS STAT US
MODES
QUICK TEST TABLE
TRENDINGS
1
1
1
1
3
PRESSURES
PUMPS STAT US
SETPOINT TABLE
MAINTENANCE MENU
1
1
2
3
INPUTS STAT US
RUN TIMES
1
1
1
2
RESET ALARMS
CURRENT ALARMS
ALARM HISTORIC
MAJOR ALARM HISTORIC
TO CONFIGURATION MENU
TO MAINTENANCE MENU
a30-5904
Fig. 13 — Configuration Menu Structure
GENERAL CONFIGURATION
2
RESET CONFIGURATION
2
4
BROADCAST MENU
2
FACTORY PARAMETERS
UPDATE RUNNING HOUR
3
4
COMPRESSOR ENABLE
3
PUMP CONFIGURATION
2
SCHEDULE MENU
2
DATE/TIME CONFIGURATION
2
FACTORY2 PARAMETERS
MASTER SLAVE CONFIG
3
EMAIL CONFIGURATION
3
USER CONFIGURATION
HOLIDAY MENU
CONTROL IDENTIFICATION
SERVICE PARAMETERS
BACNET PARAMETERS
3
3
2
2
2
a30-5905
Fig. 14 — Maintenance Menu Structure
CAPACITY CONTROL
EXV CONTROL
EXV ECO. CONTROL
VLT DRIVE MAINTENANCE
CONTROL LIMITS
FAN CONTROL
FAN DRIVE ADDRESSING
LAST POWER ON RESET
MASTER SLAVE CONTROL
FAN DRIVE MAINTENANCE
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
a30-5906
TROUBLESHOOT
3
LEGEND — FIG. 12-14
1—All (no password required) 2—User access required (default password = 11) 3—Service access required (default password = 88) 4—Factory access required (default password = 113)
NOTE: For more information about password access, see the sec­tion Touch Pilot
™
Login and Display Setup on page 8.
10
Page 11
SETTING TIME AND DATE — The date and time for the
Fig. 15 — Touch Pilot Display Interface and Connectors
controls can be set by opening the Main Menu Configuration Menu Date/Time Configuration. The date, time, day of the week, and daylight saving time option can be set on this screen.
WEB AND NETWORK INTERFACE — The Touch Pilot control can be configured to allow access via a standard, java­enabled web browser or over a network. See Appendix H for detailed information on setting up and accessing the Touch Pi­lot via the web or network interface. See Table 5 for port con­nections. See Fig. 15 for interface and connectors.
Table 5 — Touch Pilot Display Port Connections
CONNECTOR FUNCTION
X5 (Power)
X4 (LEN)
X3 (CCN)
X2 (Ethernet) —
X1 (USB) —
24 VAC + 24 VAC – RS485 Port (D+) RS485 Port (GND) RS485 Port (D–) RS485 Port (D+) RS485 Port (GND) RS485 Port (D–)
Input/Output (SIOB) Boards — There are two
SIOB (Standard Input/Output Boards) boards for each unit, SIOB-A (address 49) for Circuit A and SIOB-B (address
50) for circuit B. See Fig. 16. The board receives inputs from thermistors, transducers, demand limit switch, dual set point switch, remote-on-off switch, chilled water flow switch, oil level switch, pump interlock contact, compressor VFD enable contact, and evaporator heater current sensing switch, and provides output control to expansion valves, oil and VI solenoids, evaporator heater contactor, isolation valves, oil heater relays, customer supplied pump relays,
compressor VFD enable relays, and customer-supplied alarm and running relays. Information is transmitted between the SIOB boards and the Touch Pilot module via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Net­work). Connections for the LEN bus are J12 and J13. Each SIOB board has a 4-position DIP switch bank used for addressing of the board. SIOB-A is at address 49 and SIOB­B is at address 50. See below for SIOB board DIP switch settings. See Tables 6 and 7 for a list of inputs and outputs for the two SIOB boards.
SIOB-A DIP Switch 1 2 3 4
Position: OFF OFF OFF OFF
SIOB-B DIP Switch 1 2 3 4
Position: ON OFF OFF OFF
Auxiliary (AUX) Boards — Two AUX boards, AUX
Board A (address 84) and AUX Board B (address 85), are installed in each unit. Each of the AUX boards has a set of jumpers, JP1 and JP2, which must be placed as shown in Fig. 17. The AUX boards respond to commands from the Touch Pilot results of the channels they monitor via the Local Equip­ment Network (LEN). See below for AUX board A and B DIP switch settings. See Tables 8 and 9 for a list of inputs and outputs for the AUX boards.
AUX BOARD A
DIP SWITCH
Address: ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
AUX BOARD B
DIP SWITCH
Address: OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
™
module and send the Touch Pilot module the
12345678
1 2 3 45678
X1 - USB CONNECTOR X2 - ETHERNET CONNECTOR X3 - CCN CONNECTOR X4 - LEN CONNECTOR
TOUCH PILOT DISPLAY INTERFACE
X5 - POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR (24 VAC)
11
X2X1
TOUCH PILOT BOTTOM VIEW
X5X4X3
a30-5895
Page 12
Fig. 16 — SIOB (Standard Input/Output Board)
a30-5864
DIP
SWITCH
GREEN LED - LEN
(Local Equipment Network)
RED LED - STAT US
12
Page 13
Table 6 — SIOB-A Inputs and Outputs
ITEM IN/OUT TYPE BOARD CONNECTOR CCN POINT DESCRIPTION
DI-01 Dry contact DI-02 Dry contact SETP_SW Dual Setpoint Switch DI-03 Dry contact LIM_SW1 Demand Limit Switch 1 OnOff DI-04 Dry contact — Not Used — DI-05 Dry contact J34 — Not Used — DI-06 Dry contact DI-07 Dry contact FLOW_SW Chilled Water Flow Switch (CWFS) DI-08 Dry contact HEATR_SW Cooler Heater Current Sensing Rly Feedback AI-01 Temp (5000 ) AI-02 Temp (5000 ) COOL_LWT Cooler Leaving Water Temperature AI-03 Temp (5000 ) OAT Outdoor Air Temperature AI-04 Temp (5000 ) CP_TMP_A Compressor A motor temperature AI-05 Temp (5000 ) ECO_T_A Economizer Temperature Circuit A AI-06 Pressure J11 DP_A Discharge Pressure Circuit A AI-07 Pressure J19 SP_A Suction Pressure Circuit A AI-08 Pressure J20 ECO_P_A Economizer Pressure Circuit A AI-09 Pressure J21 OP_A Oil Pressure Circuit A AI-10 4 to 20 mA J9 — Not Used — DO-01 Relay output DO-02 Relay output CPUMP_2 Customer Pump Relay #2 DO-03 Relay output DO-04 Relay output VFD_EN_A VFD Enable Output Circuit A DO-05 Relay contact J23 ALARM Alarm Relay DO-06 Relay contact J22 RUNNING Running Relay DO-07 Triac DO-08 Triac C_HEATER Cooler Heater Contactor DO-09 Triac VI_A VI Solenoid Control Compressor Circuit A DO-10 Triac ISO_POS_A Isolation Valve Relay Circuit A STPR1 Stepper motor J17 EXV_A EXV-A STPR2 Stepper motor J18 ECO_A ECEXV-A AO-01 0 to 10 VDC J10 — Not Used —
J1
J3
J25
J2
J6
J7
ONOFF_ SW Remote On-Off Switch (SW1)
OIL_L_A Oil Level Switch Circuit A
COOL_EWT Cooler Entering Water Temperature
CPUMP_1 Customer Pump Relay #1
OIL_HT_A Oil Heater Contactor Circuit A
OIL_SL_A Oil Solenoid Circuit A
Table 7 — SIOB-B Inputs and Outputs
ITEM IN/OUT TYPE BOARD CONNECTOR CCN POINT DESCRIPTION
DI-01 Dry contact DI-02 Dry contact — Not Used — DI-03 Dry contact — Not Used — DI-04 Dry contact — Not Used — DI-05 Dry contact J34 — Not Used — DI-06 Dry contact DI-07 Dry contact FLOW_SWB Customer Supplied Pump Interlock Relay DI-08 Dry contact — Not Used — AI-01 Temp (5000 ) AI-02 Temp (5000 ) — Not Used — AI-03 Temp (5000 ) CHWSTEMP Dual chiller temperature (accessory) AI-04 Temp (5000 ) CP_TMP_B Compressor motor temperature Circuit B
AI-05 Temp (5000 ) ECO_T_B Economizer temperature Circuit B AI-06 Pressure AI-07 Pressure J19 SP_B Suction pressure Circuit B
AI-08 Pressure AI-09 Pressure AI-10 4 to 20 mA DO-01 Relay output
DO-02 Relay output — Not Used — DO-03 Relay output DO-04 Relay output VFD_EN_B VFD enable output Circuit B DO-05 Relay contact J23 — Not Used —
DO-06 Relay contact J22 — Not Used — DO-07 Triac DO-08 Triac BOX_HTR Control box heater DO-09 Triac VI_B Vi solenoid control compressor Circuit B DO-10 Triac ISO_POS_B Isolation valve relay Circuit B STPR1 Stepper motor J17 EXV_B EXV-B STPR2 Stepper motor
AO-01 0 to 10 VDC
J1
J3
J25
J11
J20 J21
J9
J2
J6
J7
J18 J10
OIL_L_B Oil level Circuit B
DP_B Discharge pressure Circuit B
ECO_P_B Economizer pressure Circuit B OP_B Oil pressure Circuit B
OIL_HT_B Oil heater contactor Circuit B
OIL_SL_B Oil solenoid Circuit B
ECO_B ECEXV-B
LEGEND
AI — Analog Input AO — Analog Output DI — Discrete Input DO — Discrete Output STPR — Stepper Motor Output
— Not Used —
— Not Used —
— Not Used — — Not Used —
— Not Used —
13
Page 14
Table 8 — AUX Board A Inputs and Outputs
Fig. 17 — AUX Board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
100K
100K
100K
CH1
CH2 CH3
CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8
TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8
STAT US SIO (LEN)
24 VAC
CH13 CH14
J9
J1
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
JP2
C61
CH13
D12
JP1
L3
L5
U21
L2
D6
D5
Q5
Y1
D7
D8
S1
D3
U1
Q1
U5
U6
U7
U8
U9
Q10
Q11
U10
J4
J3
J2
U4
U2
Q12
Q60
3 2 1
– G +
3 2 1
– G +
DIP SWITCH
J5
J6
J7 J8
RED LED - STAT US
GREEN LED - LEN (Local Equipment Network)
JUMPER JP2 JUMPER JP1
CHANNEL IN/OUT TYPE BOARD CONNECTOR CCN POINT DESCRIPTION (SEE NOTE 1)
CH 1 DO CH 2 DO FC2_A Fan A Stage 2 CH 3 DO FC3_A Fan A Stage 3
J2
CH 4 DO FC4_A Fan A Stage 4 CH 5 DO CH 6 DO FC6_A Fan A Stage 6 CH 7 DO FC7_A Fan A Stage 7
J3
CH 8 DO FC8_A Fan A Stage 8 CH 9 AO J4 CAPT010A % Capacity Circuit A (0-10Vdc) CH 10 AO J5 — Not Used CH 11 AI CH 12 AI SUCT_A Suction Gas Temperature Circuit A
J6
CH 13 AI J7 LIQ_T_A Liquid Temperature Circuit A CH 14 AI J8 LIQ_P_A Liquid Pressure Circuit A
Table 9 — AUX Board B Inputs and Outputs
CHANNEL IN/OUT TYPE BOARD CONNECTOR CCN POINT DESCRIPTION (SEE NOTE 1)
CH 1 DO CH 2 DO FC2_B Fan B Stage 2 CH 3 DO FC3_B Fan B Stage 3 CH 4 DO FC4_B Fan B Stage 4 CH 5 DO CH 6 DO FC6_B Fan B Stage 6 CH 7 DO FC7_B Fan B Stage 7 CH 8 DO FC8_B Fan B Stage 8 CH 9 AO J4 CAPT010B % Capacity Circuit B (0-10Vdc) CH 10 AO J5 — Not Used CH 11 AI CH 12 AI SUCT_B Suction Gas Temperature Circuit B CH 13 AI J7 LIQ_T_B Liquid Temperature Circuit B CH 14 AI J8 LIQ_P_B Liquid Pressure Circuit B
Note: Fan A and B stage outputs are only used on STANDARD TIER units, identified by the 10th position in the model number.
J2
J3
J6
FC1_A Fan A Stage 1
FC5_A Fan A Stage 5
DGT_A Discharge Gas Temperature Circuit A
FC1_B Fan B Stage 1
FC5_B Fan B Stage 5
DGT_B Discharge Gas Temperature Circuit B
14
Page 15
Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch (SW1) —
Fig. 18 — Energy Management Module
221
221
221
221
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
CH 17
CH 17
CH 16
CH
CH 18
CH 19
CH 20
CH 22
CH 21
CH 23
24 VAC
12 11
CH
11b
CH
12
CH
13
CH
14
CH
15
CH
1
CH
2
CH
3
CH
4
CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
SIO LEN
+ G -
+ G -
SIO LEN
J8
J7B
J7A
J6
J5
J4 J3 J2B
J2A
J1
CH
24CH25
CH
8
CH
9
CH
10
CH 11a
J9A
J9B
RED LED - STAT US
GREEN LED - LEN (Local Equipment Network)
The position of the Enable/Off/Remote contact switch is ignored except when the “remote mode” control type is selected. Refer to the Machine Control Methods section on page 20 for more details. A selection for Machine Control Method must also be made along with the correct position of the Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch. This switch is installed in all units. It is a 3-position switch used to control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position, the chiller will be under its own control. When switched to the Off position, the chiller will shut down. When switched to the Remote Con­tact position, a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of handling a 24­VAC, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configuration and set point data.
Emergency On/Off Switch (SW2) — This switch is
installed in all units. The Emergency On/Off switch should only be used when it is required to shut the chiller off immedi­ately. Power to all modules is interrupted when this switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off.
Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM
is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-installed accessory. See Fig. 18. The EMM receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the temperature reset, cooling set point and demand limit functions. The EMM also receives switch inputs for the field­installed second stage 2-step demand limit and ice done func­tions. The EMM communicates the status of all inputs with the Touch Pilot module, and the controls adjusts the control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to the inputs received. See Table 10 for EMM board inputs and outputs.
CAUTION
Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac­turer’s control systems due to possible power supply differ­ences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification, which could lead to equipment damage. The two different power supplies cannot be mixed. Touch Pilot half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge rectifier signal generating device is used.
™
controls use
15
Page 16
Table 10 — EMM Board Inputs and Outputs
*Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont.
CHANNEL
CH 01 AI CH 02 AI SPACETMP Space temperature AI-02 10K Thermistor CH 03 AI — — AI-03 5/10K Thermistor CH 04 AI — — AI-04 5/10K Thermistor CH 05 AI J7A SP_RESET Setpoint reset AI-06 0-5V CH 06 AI J7B LIM_ANAL Capacity limit AI-07 0-5V CH 07 AO J8 CAP_T % Total capacity running AO-01 0-10VdC CH 08 DI J4, CH8 OCC_OVSW Occupancy override DI-01 — CH 09 DI J4, CH9 LIM_SW2 Demand limit SW2 DI-02 — CH 10 DI J4, CH10 REM_LOCK Remote lockout switch DI-03 — CH 11a DI J4, CH11A ICE_SW Ice done DI-04 — CH 11b DI J4, CH11B — — DI-05 — CH 12 DI J5, CH12 — — DI-06 — CH 13 DI J5, CH13 — — DI-07 — CH 14 DI J5, CH14 — — DI-08 — CH 15 DI J5, CH15 — — DI-09 — CH 16 DO J2A CP_A Compressor A run status DO-01 Triac CH 17 DO J2A CP_B Compressor B run status DO-02 Triac CH 18 DO J2A — — — — CH 19 DO J2A — — — — CH 20 DO J2B — — — — CH 21 DO J2B — — — — CH 22 DO J2B — — — — CH 23 DO J2B — — — — CH 24 DO J3 SHUTDOWN Shutdown relay DO-09 Relay CH 25 DO J3 ALERT Alert relay DO-10 Relay
IN/OUT
TYPE
BOARD
CONNECTOR
J6
CCN POINT
— — AI-01 5/10K Thermistor
Local Equipment Network — Information is trans-
mitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network).
Board Addresses — All boards (except the Touch Pilot
display and the Energy Management Module board) have DIP switches to set the address.

Control Module Communication

RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs (light­emitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status LEDs will blink in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify that cor­rect power is being supplied to all modules and that all com­munication wiring is connected securely. Be sure that the Touch Pilot If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still persists, replace the Touch Pilot module. A red LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the board should be replaced.
GREEN LED — All boards have a green LEN (Local Equipment Network) LED which should be blinking when-
™
module is supplied with the current software.
POINT
DESCRIPTION
Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface —
All 30XV units can be connected to the CCN, if desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it. The negative and sig­nal ground pins of each system element must also be wired in the same manner. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB3. Consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for further in­formation. See Fig. 19.
NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/ nylon, vinyl, Teflon*, or polyethylene. An aluminum/ polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20 C to 60 C is required. See Table 11 for recommended wire manufacturers and part numbers.
Table 11 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring
ever power is on. If the LEDs are not blinking as described check LEN connections for potential communication errors at the board connectors. A 3-wire bus accomplishes com­munication between modules. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. They connect to J9 on EMM and AUX boards, and to J12 or J13 on SIOB boards. A valid unit configuration must be in the Touch Pilot module for proper LEN communication.
MANUFACTURER
Alpha 1895 — American A21451 A48301 Belden 8205 884421 Columbia D6451 — Manhattan M13402 M64430 Quabik 6130 —
I/O POINT
NAME
PART NUMBER
Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring
INPUT/OUTPUT
TYPE
16
Page 17
It is important when connecting to a CCN communication
a30-4082
Fig. 19 — Touch Pilot CCN Communication Wiring
bus that a color-coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables contain­ing different colored wires.
At each system element, the shields of its communication bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the commu­nication bus cable exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning sup­pressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to the network:
1. Turn off power to the control box.
2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropri­ate colors for different colored cables.)
3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on TB3 of the plug, the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the (–) terminal.
4. The RJ14 CCN connector on TB3 can also be used, but is only intended for temporary connection (for example, a laptop computer running Service Tool).
IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, discon­nect the CCN bus. If conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the bus.

CONFIGURATION (SOFTWARE)

Touch Pilot™ Operation Configuration Tables —
ured for a range of operating conditions and equipment arrangements. The following parameters should be configured based on unique system layout and operating requirements.
The system parameters may be configured through the Touch Pilot interface or remotely through the CCN. Table 12 shows the Touch Pilot configuration required to access the unit on the CCN.
Table 12 — Touch Pilot Controller Identification
PATH DISPLAY NAME VALUE
Main Menu Configuration Menu Control Identification
The Touch Pilot control system can be config-
Configuration Table
CCN Element Number Default=1 CCN Bus Number Default=0 CCN Baud Rate Default=9600 Location Description Default=Blank
Touch Pilot Menu Tables — Touch Pilot operation is
controlled by configuration information entered in the configu­ration tables listed in Tables 13-16. Access to different parame­ters may be available to all users (BASIC) or password-protect­ed (USER, FACTORY, or SERVICE). See Appendix A for de­tailed descriptions of all control tables and parameters.
Remote Alarm and Alert Relays — The 30XV chiller
can be equipped with remote alert and remote alarm annuncia­tor contacts. Both relays connected to these contacts must be rated for a maximum power draw of 10 va sealed, 25 va inrush at 24 volts. The alarm relay, indicating that the complete unit has been shut down, can be connected to TB5-12 and TB5-21. Refer to unit wiring diagrams. For run relay, indicating that at least 1 circuit is off due to an alert state, a field-supplied and in­stalled relay must be connected between TB5-13 and TB5-20.
17
Page 18
Table 13 — Main Menu Table
ITEM CCN MENU NAME ACCESS MENU TEXT DESCRIPTION MENU ICON
1 GENUINT ALL General Parameters
2 TEMP ALL Temperatures
3 PRESSURE ALL Pressures
4 INPUTS ALL Inputs Status
5 OUTPUTS ALL Outputs Status
6 PUMPSTAT ALL Pump Status
7 RUNTIME ALL Run Times
8 MODES ALL Modes
9 SETPOINT USER Setpoint Table
10 CONFIG USER Configuration Menu
11 QCK_TEST SERVICE Quick Test
12 MAINTAIN SERVICE Maintenance Menu
13 TRENDING ALL Trendings
Table 14 — Alarms Menu Table
ITEM CCN MENU NAME ACCESS MENU TEXT DESCRIPTION MENU ICON
1 ALARMRST USER Reset Alarms
2 CUR_ALM ALL Current Alarms
3 ALMHIST1 ALL Alarm Historic
4 ALMHIST2 ALL Major Alarm Historic
18
Page 19
Table 15 — Configuration Menu Table
ITEM CCN MENU NAME ACCESS MENU TEXT DESCRIPTION MENU ICON
1 GEN_CONF USER General Configuration
2 PUMPCONF USER Pump Configuration
3 USERCONF USER User Configuration
4 RESETCFG USER Reset Configuration
5 SCHEDULE USER Schedule Menu
6 HOLIDAY USER Holiday Menu
7 BROCASTS USER Broadcast Menu
8 DATETIME USER Date/Time Configuration
9 CTRL_ID USER Control Identification
10 FACTORY FACTORY Factory Parameters
11 FACTORY2 FACTORY Factory2 Parameters
12 SERVICE SERVICE Service Parameters
13 UPDTHOUR SERVICE Update Running Hour
14 MST_SLV SERVICE Master Slave Config
15 CMP_PI* SERVICE Comp PI Parameters
17 EXV_CFG* SERVICE EXV Configuration
18 DELTA* SERVICE Action Parameters
19 BACNET SERVICE BACnet Parameters
20 FAN_CFG* SERVICE Fan Configuration
21 ECO_PI* SERVICE EXV ECO PI Parameters
22 CP_UNABL SERVICE Compressor Enable
23 EMAILCFG SERVICE Email Configuration
* Tables available only through the CCN.
19
Page 20
Table 16 — Maintenance Menu Table
Fig. 20 — Machine Control Methods
ITEM CCN MENU NAME ACCESS MENU TEXT DESCRIPTION ICON
1 CAPACTRL SERVICE Capacity Control
2 VLT_DRV SERVICE VLT Drive Maintenance
3 LAST_POR SERVICE Last PowerOn Reset
4 EXV_CTRL SERVICE EXV Control
5 LIMITS SERVICE Control Limits
6 M_MSTSLV SERVICE Master Slave Control
7 ECO_CTRL SERVICE EXV Eco. Control
8 FAN_CTRL SERVICE Fan Control
9 FAN_DRV SERVICE Fan Drive Maintenance
10 TBLSHT SERVICE Troubleshoot Info
11 FAN_DRV2 SERVICE Fan Drive Addressing
Machine Control Methods — The unit state is deter-
mined based on a number of factors, including its operating type, active overrides, open contacts, master/slave configura­tion, or alarms triggered due to operating conditions. These pa­rameters can be controlled by one of the following methods:
• Locally on unit: Local Control type
• Remotely through a user contact: Remote Control type
• Remotely through the CCN network: CCN Control type The main interface Start/Stop button is used to select one of
the above control types. In addition, when the Local control type is selected, this button can be used to select a particular functional mode: On, Off or Schedule mode. See Fig. 20. If the Start/Stop button is green the unit is running. If the Start/Stop button is gray the unit is not running. If the button is flashing green then the unit is preparing to start.
Table 17 summarizes the available operating types.
SHOWS THE LAST MODE
SELECTED
STA RT / STOP
BUTTON
a30-5917
20
Page 21
Table 17 — Operating Types
BACK BUTTON
a30-5894
Fig. 21 — Confirm Stop
OPERATING TYPE CONTROL METHOD
LOCAL — OFF
LOCAL — ON
LOCAL — SCHEDULE
NETWORK
REMOTE
MASTER
Local Off
Local On
Local Schedule
CCN None
Remote None
Master Master
OPERATING
MODES
OPERATING TYPE SELECTION — The operating type is selected through the main interface by pressing the Start/ Stop button .
If the unit is running, pressing the Start/Stop button dis­plays a screen with a Confirm Stop button (see Fig. 21), which when pressed switches the chiller to Local Off mode. If the unit is Off, pressing the Start/Stop button shows a list of operating types with the currently selected type correspond­ing to the last running operating type (Fig. 20).
Start/Stop Selection Screen
— In Local mode (LEN bus), the Touch Pilot treats the Start/Stop button as a hotkey, and goes directly to the Start/Stop selection screen. In CCN mode, the Touch Pilot ignores Start/Stop key presses.
Start a Stopped Machine mode, press the gray Start/Stop button
— With the unit in the Local off
to display the list of
operating modes and select the required mode. Stop a Running Machine
— To stop a running unit, press the green Start/Stop button . Confirm the unit shutdown by pressing Confirm Stop or cancel by pressing the Back button (Fig. 21).
Once the unit has been stopped, the Home screen is
displayed. NOTE: Start/Stop a machine is not authorized through a web
connection for security reasons.
Machine On/Off Function — The machine operating
state can be viewed by going to Main Menu General Param­eters Run Status. Table 18 summarizes possible unit states.
DESCRIPTION
The unit is under Local control method. It will remain halted and will ignore all CCN network commands and remote switch contacts.
The unit is under Local control method and will be allowed to start. The control will ignore all remote control contacts (except the demand limit contact) and all CCN network force commands (except the Emergency Stop Command).
The unit is under Local control method and will be allowed to start if the schedule #1 is occupied (chil_occ). Otherwise, the unit will remain off. The control will ignore all remote control contacts (except the demand limit con­tact) and all CCN network force commands (except the Emergency Stop Command).
The unit is under CCN control method and will be controlled by CCN force commands. The control will ignore all remote control contacts (except the demand limit contact).
The unit is under Remote control method and will be controlled by the start/ stop and set point contacts. In this mode, no CCN force command can affect the unit control except the Emergency Stop Command.
The unit is configured as the master unit in a two-unit master/slave plant. The master unit control method can be done locally, remotely or through CCN commands upon the master/slave configuration.
Table 18 — Unit States
STATE DESCRIPTION
Off Unit is commanded to be off Stopping
Delay
Running
Ready
Override Tripout Unit is Off due to an alarm
Test Unit is in Quick Test
Unit is currently stopping (after a manual, emergency, or shutdown request). Next state will be Off.
Unit is in delay at start-up (waiting for the end of the On/Off delay to be reached). Next state will be Running.
Unit compressor capacity is more that 0% (unit has started running)
Unit compressor capacity is 0%. Unit is ready to start.
The compressor cannot start because of an override (SST, SCT, etc.)
Table 19 summarizes the unit control method and stop or go status with regard to the following parameters set in the Touch Pilot:
• Active operating type: Operating Type as selected on the
unit Start-Stop screen.
• CHIL_S_S: Current CCN chiller start/stop force com-
mand (enable/disable). Main Menu General Parame-
ters Net:Cmd Start/Stop.
• Onoff_sw: Start-stop contact status when unit is under
remote operating type. Main Menu Inputs Status
Remote On/Off Switch.
• chil_occ state: Chiller occupied state. If the occupancy
override input switch is closed, the chiller remains occu-
pied regardless of the set point scheduled selection. Main
Menu General Parameters Net:Cmd Occupied.
• ms_ctrl: Master control type. This parameter status will
determine if the master unit is going to be controlled
locally, remotely, or through CCN. Main Menu Main-
tenance Menu Master Slave Control (0=disabled,
1=master, 2=slave).
• EMSTOP: CCN emergency stop command (enable/dis-
able). Main Menu General Parameters Emergency
Stop
• Alarm shutdown: Unit is totally stopped due to alarm.
21
Page 22
Table 19 — Start/Stop Control
ACTIVE OPERATING TYPE
Local Off (LOFF) — — — — — — Local Off
Local On (L-C) — — — — Disable No Local On
Local Schedule (L-SC)
Remote (rEM)
CCN
Master (MA St)
—————
LEGEND
chil_occ — Chiller Occupied State CHIL_S_S — CCN Chiller Start/Stop Command EMSTOP — Emergency Stop L-C — Local Control Operating Type L-SC — Local Schedule Operating Type MA St — Master/Slave Operating Type ms-ctrl — Master/Slave Control Onoff_sw — Remote On/Off Switch rEM — Remote Operating Type
CHIL_S_S Onoff_sw ms-ctrl chil_occ state EMSTOP
— — — Occupied Disable No Local On — — — Unoccupied — — Local Off — Open — — — — Remote Off — — — Unoccupied — — Remote Off
Closed Occupied — — Remote On
Disable — — — — — CCN Off
— — — Unoccupied — — CCN Off
Enable — — Occupied Disabled No CCN On
— — Local Unoccupied — — Local Off — Open Remote — — — Remote Off — — Remote Unoccupied — — Remote Off
Disable — CCN — — — CCN Off
— — CCN Unoccupied — — CCN Off — — Local Occupied Disable No Local On — Closed Remote Occupied Disable No Remote On
Enable CCN Occupied Disable No CCN On
All of the control type and unit state combinations listed in Table 19 will determine the actual unit running state. In addi­tion, when under remote type control, unit Start/Stop actions will be determined by both On/Off and Occupied/Unoccupied status if the changeover option is enabled. If the changeover option is not enabled, only the On/Off switch will be used to command the unit to Start or Stop.
NOTE: When changing from one control method (Local, Remote, or CCN) to another, the unit will observe a transition through the Off state before being allowed to start again. At this time the on-to-off delay is always applied.
MACHINE START DELAY — An option to delay the start of the machine is available. This parameter is useful in keeping multiple machines from starting at the same time in case of a power failure. The parameter has a factory default of 1 minute. This parameter also has a role in the timing for a chilled water flow switch alarm. To configure this option with the Touch Pi­lot display, select Main Menu Configuration Menu Gen­eral Configuration and select Unit Off to On Delay.
FAST LOADING — The Fast Capacity Recovery function allows for an accelerated unit start-up. This is especially useful following brief power outages at data centers where rapid re­start can keep data center operating. This should not be used on normal comfort cooling applications. To activate the Fast Ca­pacity Recovery, go to Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters and set Fast Capacity Recovery. The avail­able options are as follows:
• 0 (Normal Loading Sequence): Follows the set delays for
unit and circuit start up
• 1 (Quick Start Loading): Ignores Capacity Override #53
(ON/OFF Delay)
• 2 (Fast Capacity Recovery): Removes the unit start-up
delay, ignores Capacity Override #53 (ON/OFF Delay),
and allows both compressors to start at the same time
(with a 10-second delay between starts)
PARAMETER STATUS
Chilled Water Set Point Configuration — The
chilled water set point and fluid type configuration will deter­mine the chiller operating conditions.
FLUID SET POINT CONTROL LOCATION — The fac­tory default for the chilled water fluid set point is to control to the leaving water temperature. An option to configure the machine for entering water control is available. To config­ure this option go to Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters. The default for Entering Fluid Control is No (leaving fluid control is the default condition).
COOLING SET POINT SELECTION — The control point represents the water temperature that the unit must produce. The unit will vary the capacity depending on the unit load operating conditions in order to satisfy the set point. The con­trol point (CTRL_PNT) is calculated based on the active set point and the reset calculation, where Control Point = Active Setpoint + Reset. (See the section Temperature Reset on page 33 for more information about Reset.) The forced value can be used instead of any other set point calculation only when Network is selected as the operating type for the unit (go to Main Menu General Parameters to verify operating type).
DEFINING SET POINTS — The cooling set points are set via the Setpoint Table (Main Menu Setpoint Table). Cooling Setpoint 1 and Cooling Setpoint 2 are the temperatures that are selectable as the Active Set Points for the unit operation. These temperatures will be limited by the type of fluid in the system (see Table 20).
In addition to the Cooling set points, users can also select the Cooling Ice Setpoint and Cooling Ramp Loading from this menu. See the Ice Storage Operation section on page 40 for more details about the Cooling Ice Setpoint. Ramp Loading limits the rate at which the unit will change cooling water tem­perature (default is 1º F/min [0.6º C/min]).
All default set points are based on Leaving Water Control (Entering Fluid Control, EWTO set to No). Values must be
Alarm
Shutdown
Enable — — Off
—Yes— Off
CONTROL
METHOD
confirmed for the individual set points. Limits for the set points
UNIT
STATUS
22
Page 23
are listed in Table 20. These values depend on the Evaporator Fluid Type and the Brine Freeze Setpoint (see Chilled Water Fluid Type Selection on page 25).
Table 20 — Evaporator Fluid Set Point Limits
Set Point
Limits
Minimum* 38 F (3.3 C) N/A N/A Maximum 60 F (15.5 C) N/A N/A
*The minimum set point for brine applications is related to the brine freeze set point. The set point is limited to be no less than the brine freeze set point + 4° F (2.2° C).
EVAPORATOR FLUID TYPE (flui_typ)
1 = Water 2 = Medium Brine 3 = Low Brine
CURRENT OPERATING SET POINT — Depending on the current operation type, the active set point can be se­lected manually in the Main Menu, with the dry user con­tacts, with network commands (CCN or BACnet), or auto­matically with the set point time schedule (Occupancy Schedule 2).
Set points can be selected manually through the main interface when the unit is in Local operating type, through contacts when the unit is in Remote operating type, or through the RS485 bus when unit is in CCN mode.
Set points can also be selected automatically through a set point time schedule: when the period is occupied Cool­ing Setpoint 1 will be activated, and when the period is Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 2 will be active. When in lo­cal operating type, time schedule is available if the Set­point Select Variable is set to AUTO (see below). In re­mote operating type, the AUTO mode will be available un­less the dual set point control through contacts has already been selected. In CCN mode, the set point selection al­ways depends on the time schedule. The set point can be forced through the SP_OCC CCN point (0 = Occupied = Cooling Setpoint 1, 1 = Unoccupied = Cooling Setpoint 2).
Set point selection offers three different control options (Main Menu General Parameters Setpoint Select): Auto, Setpoint 1, and Setpoint 2.
• 0 = Auto: The active cooling set point will be determined
by the configured Occupancy Schedules. See the Defin-
ing Occupancy Schedule section for details on setting the
schedules. Depending on the Ice Storage configuration
Table 21 — Active Cooling Set Point Parameters
and ice contact state, the active set point may alternately be set to the Cooling Ice Setpoint.
• 1 = Setpoint 1: The active cooling set point will be Cool­ing Setpoint 1 defined in the set point table.
• 2 = Setpoint 2: The active cooling set point will be Cool­ing Setpoint 2 defined in the set point table. Depending on the Ice Storage configuration and ice contact state, the active set point may alternately be set to the Cooling Ice Setpoint.
SETPOINT OCCUPANCY — Setpoint Occupancy is the de­fault configuration for the Setpoint Select variable. When Set­point Select (Main Menu General Parameters Setpoint Select) is configured to 0 (Auto), the unit’s active set point is based on the programmed occupancy schedules. Under Time Schedule 1 (OCCPC01S), the unit controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (csp1) during the occupied periods. If the Time Sched­ule 2 (OCCPC02S) is in use, the unit’s active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (csp1) (Main Menu Setpoint Table Cooling Setpoint 1) during the occupied period and Cooling Set Point 2 (csp2) (Main Menu Setpoint Table Cooling Setpoint 2) during the unoccupied period. The two schedules are used together to determine periods when the chiller will be controlling to Setpoint 1, Setpoint 2, or Off.
See Table 21 for details on how the active cooling set point is
determined based on unit operating type and parameter settings. DEFINING OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE — Two internal
Time Schedules are available and must be field programmed. Occupancy Schedule 1 (OCCPC01S) is used for single set point On/Off control. Occupancy Schedule 2 (OCCPC02S) is used in combination with OCCPC01S for dual set point On/Off and Occupied/Unoccupied set point control. To access the Schedule screens, go to Main Menu Configuration Menu Schedule Menu.
If the chiller is to be controlled to a single set point, use
Schedule 1 (OCCPC01S). This type of schedule will start and stop the machine only. During the unoccupied times, the chiller will be off. The unit start/stop schedule OCCPC01S has a de­fault setting of always occupied. If the chiller is to be controlled to 2 set points, occupied and unoccupied, also use Schedule 2 (OCCPC02S). Cooling Setpoint 1 will be active during occu­pied periods, and Cooling Setpoint 2 will be active during un­occupied periods.
OPERATING
TYPE
Local
Remote
Network
* Ice Storage Configuration and Ice Done Contact apply only to units with energy management module (EMM).
Setpoint
Selection
sp-1 Default Any Any Default Cooling Setpoint 1 sp-2 No Any Any Default Cooling Setpoint 2 sp-2 Yes Closed Any N/A Cooling Setpoint 2
sp-2 Yes Open Any N/A Cooling Ice Setpoint automatic Default Any Any Occupied Cooling Setpoint 1 automatic No Any Any Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 2 automatic Yes Closed Any Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 2 automatic Yes Open Any Unoccupied Cooling Ice Setpoint
Default Default Any Open Default Cooling Setpoint 1 Default No Any Closed Default Cooling Setpoint 2
N/A Yes Closed Closed N/A Cooling Setpoint 2 Default Yes Open Closed Default Cooling Ice Setpoint Default Default Any Any Occupied Cooling Setpoint 1 Default Default Any Any Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 2
Ice Storage
Configuration*
PARAMETER STATUS
Ice Done Contact*
23
Setpoint
Switch
Schedule 2 Status
ACTIVE SETPOINT
Page 24
To set the occupancy schedules, select OCCPC01S or OC-
Fig. 22 — Schedule Menu
SELECT THE DAYS FOR THIS PERIOD
SCHEDULE
SET THE
OCCUPIED TIMES
SAVE
CANCEL
PREVIOUS PERIOD
NEXT PERIOD
CPC02S and select the applicable days for the displayed time schedule period. The selected period will be displayed as a green band on the timeline. Press the Save button to confirm or the Cancel button to cancel changes. See Fig. 22.
The schedules consist of 8 user-configurable occupied time periods. The control supports time schedules for local control, remote control, and ice building. These time periods can be flagged to be in effect or not in effect on each day of the week. The day begins at 00:00 and ends at 24:00. The machine is in unoccupied mode unless a scheduled time period is in effect. If an occupied period is to extend past midnight, the occupied pe­riod must end at 24:00 hours (midnight) and a new occupied period must be programmed to begin at 00:00 hours.
In the example in Table 22, an early morning pulldown time period is scheduled for Monday morning from 12:00 AM to 3:00 AM. The occupied period starts at 7:00 AM, Monday through Saturday. The occupied time ends at 6:00 PM on Mon­day and Tuesday, 9:30 PM on Wednesday, 5:00 PM on Thurs­day and Friday, and 12:00 PM on Saturday.
NOTE: This example schedule was designed to illustrate the programming of the schedule function and is not intended as a recommended schedule for chiller operation.
Holiday Schedule
— The unit control allows up to 16 holiday periods. Each holiday period is defined by three parameters: the month, the start day, and the duration of the holiday period. During the holiday periods, the controller will be in occupied or unoccupied mode, depending on the periods validated as holidays. The Holiday Configuration Table is accessed by Main Menu Configuration Menu Holiday Menu. Select one of the 16 available Holiday periods (HOLDY_01 through HOLDY_16) to define the holiday.
CCN Global Time Schedule onboard occupancy schedules (OCCPC01S and OCCPC02S), the Touch Pilot
™
can also receive a time schedule broadcast
— In addition to the two
from another element in the CCN network.
The 30XV with Greenspeed
®
intelligence chillers can be configured to follow a CCN Global Time Schedule broadcast by another system element. The Occupancy Table (OC­CPC01S) number must be changed to configure the unit to broadcast a Global Time Schedule. The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCCPC65S to OCCPC99S). When OCC1PxxS is set to a value of 65 or greater and all attached schedules are 00:00 (that is, no occupied time periods), an oc­cupancy flag is broadcast over the CCN every time it transi­tions from occupied to unoccupied or vice-versa. The Comfort­VIEW™ Network Manager’s Configure and Modify com­mands or the Service Tool’s Modify/Names function must be used to change the number of the Occupancy Equipment Part Table Name (OCCPC01E) to the Global Schedule Number. The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCCPC65E to OCCPC99E).
Table 22 — Configuring Schedules (Example)
ITEM PATH VALUE
Period 1 Occupied from Occupied to 03:00 Monday Select Yes Tuesday Select No Wednesday Select No Thursday Select No Friday Select No Saturday Select No Sunday Select No Holiday Select No
Occupied from Occupied to 18:00 Monday Select Yes Tuesday Select Yes Wednesday Select No Thursday Select No Friday Select No Saturday Select No Sunday Select No Holiday Select No
Occupied from Occupied to 21:30 Monday Select No Tuesday Select No Wednesday Select Yes Thursday Select No Friday Select No Saturday Select No Sunday Select No Holiday Select No
Occupied from Occupied to 17:00 Monday Select No Tuesday Select No Wednesday Select No Thursday Select Yes Friday Select Yes Saturday Select No Sunday Select No Holiday Select No
Occupied from Occupied to 12:00 Monday Select No Tuesday Select No Wednesday Select No Thursday Select No Friday Select No Saturday Select Yes Sunday Select No Holiday Select No
Main Menu Menu Schedule Menu 
OCCPC01S or OCCPC02S
Main Menu Menu
OCCPC01S or OCCPC02S
Main Menu Menu Schedule Menu 
OCCPC01S or OCCPC02S
Main Menu Menu
OCCPC01S or OCCPC02S
Main Menu Menu
OCCPC01S or OCCPC02S
Configuration
Page 1
Period 2
Configuration
Schedule Menu 
Page 2
Period 3
Configuration
Page 3
Period 4
Configuration
Schedule Menu 
Page 4
Period 5
Configuration
Schedule Menu 
Page 5
00:00
07:00
07:00
07:00
07:00
When OCC1PxxS is set to a value of 65 or greater and a time schedule is configured for at least one occupancy period, the system will assume that the unit is going to be the master element for this schedule (the system element doing the broad­casting). In that case the unit Equipment and Supervisory part table names will be automatically modified to OCCPCxxE and OCCPCxxS.
24
Page 25
By configuring their appropriate Time Schedule decisions
Fig. 23 — Wiring for Evaporator Pump Control
to the same number, other devices on the network can follow this same schedule. The Enable/Off/Remote Contact must be in the Enable position or the Remote Contact position with the contacts closed for the unit to operate.
The Unit Run Status (Main Menu General Parameters Run Status) will indicate the current status of the machine de­pending on the schedule. The unit Occupied status (Main Menu General Parameters Setpoint Occupied) will indi­cate the current occupied schedule according to the schedule, either NO or YES.
The Status Unit Control Type (Main Menu General Pa­rameters) will be 0 when the switch is Off. The Status Unit Control Type will be 2 when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On.
CCN Control
— To operate under this control, Network must be selected under the Select Machine Mode accessed by press­ing the Start/Stop button (see the Operating Type Selection sec­tion on page 21).
An external CCN device such as Chillervisor controls the On/Off state of the machine. Careful evaluation of Chilled Wa­ter Plant control is necessary. In the event Local Control is es­tablished, be sure that all pumps, valves, and other devices are capable of operating properly. In the event of a loss of commu­nication with the network, the machine will start and be con­trolled locally. The CCN device forces the variable CHIL_S_S to control the chiller. The Unit Run Status (Main Menu General Parameters Run Status) will indicate the current status of the machine (OFF, RUNNING, STOPPING or DE­LAY), depending on the CCN command. The unit Occupied status (Main Menu General Parameters) will indicate the current occupied state according to the CCN command and will be displayed as either NO or YES. The Status Unit Control Type (ctrl_typ) will be LOCAL OFF when the Start/Stop but­ton is Off. The Status Unit Control Type will be CCN when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is Closed and the CHIL_S_S variable is Stop or Start. For dual chiller control applications, the slave chiller must be enabled using the CCN CONTROL option.
CHILLED WATER FLUID TYPE SELECTION — The chilled water fluid type must be configured to obtain the proper leaving water set point control range and freeze protection. The Evaporator Fluid Type (flui_typ) (Main Menu Configura­tion Menu Service Parameters Evaporator Fluid Type) can be set to water or brine.
To configure this option:
DISPLAY
NAME
Evaporator Fluid Type
Fresh Water
PATH VALUE
1 = Water 38 to 60 F
Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters
2 = Medium brine
3 = Low brine N/A
— Configure the unit Evaporator Fluid Type to
SETPOINT
RANGE
(3.3 to 15.5 C) N/A
Water for units without brine or glycol installed in the chilled water loop. The factory default fluid type is fresh water. This option will allow for a water temperature set point range of 38 to 60 F (3.3 to 15.5 C). With water as the selection, the freeze point is fixed at 34 F (1.1 C).
Evaporator Pump Control — Evaporator pump con-
trol is required on all units unless the chilled water pump runs continuously or the chilled water system contains a suitable antifreeze solution. The 30XV units with Greenspeed ligence can be configured for single or dual external evapora­tor pump control with the standard controls. In addition to the pumps, all wiring including connections to the pump contac­tor and a feedback circuit from the contactor must be field
®
intel-
supplied. Table 23 summarizes evaporator pump configura­tion parameters. Fig. 23 shows the wiring.
Table 23 — Evaporator Pump Configuration
Parameters
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Evaporator Pumps Sequence
Pump Auto Rotation Delay
Pump Sticking Protection
Flow Checked If Pump Off
Main Menu Configuration Menu Pump Configuration
0 = No Pump (Default) 1 = One Pump Only 2 = Two Pumps Auto 3 = Pump #1 Manual 4 = Pump #2 Manual
Default: 48 hrs. (Range 24 to 3000 hrs.)
Default: No
Default: Yes
PUMP SELECTION — The Evaporator Pump Sequence mode can be reached by following Main Menu Configura­tion Menu Pump Configuration. The available settings are:
• 0 = No Pump: The evaporator pump will not be con­trolled by the chiller. This is the default setting.
• 1 = One Pump Only: If only one pump is selected it will be the active pump.
• 2 = Two Pump Auto: When two pumps are selected in auto mode, only one pump will be allowed to run at a time and the control will determine the On/Off state of each pump. The control will start the pumps and auto­matically alternate the operation of the pumps to even the wear on the pumps, based on the hours configured under Pump Auto Rotation Delay (Main Menu Configura­tion Menu  Pump Configuration  Pump Auto Rota­tion Delay). If the difference between the operating hours of the two pumps exceeds the Pump Auto Rotation Delay the lead pump will change. If a flow failure is detected, the other pump will attempt to start.
• 3 = Pump #1 Manual: Pump #1 will be the active pump.
• 4 = Pump #2 Manual: Pump #2 will be the active pump. When the Evaporator Pumps Sequence is configured, the
evaporator pump output will be energized when the chiller en­ters an On state. Proof of flow from the chilled water flow switch (CWFS) is required for the unit to start mechanical cooling. The evaporator pump output is also energized when certain alarms are generated. The evaporator pump output should be used as an override to the external pump control if evaporator pump control is not utilized. The evaporator pump output is energized if a 10001 Evaporator Freeze Protection alarm is generated, which provides additional freeze protection if the system is not protected with a suitable antifreeze solution.
If the Master/Slave function is not active for the chiller
or if the Master/Slave function is active and the unit is the lead, the pump will be turned on when the unit is in On, Stopping or Delay state. In addition, when the unit is turned off the pump will continue operating for 20 seconds after
25
Page 26
the last compressor is turned off. The pump will be turned on when requested by the evaporator heater function (see the Evaporator Freeze Protection section on page 59).
PERIODIC PUMP QUICK START — The control system has the ability to start the pumps periodically to maintain bearing lubrication and seal integrity. This function will be used when the unit is stopped for a long time period (e.g., during the winter season). If Pump Sticking Protection (Main Menu Configuration Menu Pump Configura­tion Pump Sticking Protection) is set to YES and if the unit is off at 2:00 PM, a pump will be started once each day for 45 seconds. If the unit has 2 pumps, Pump 1 will be started on even days (such as day 2, 4, or 6 of the month); Pump 2 will be started on odd days (such as day 1, 3 or 5 of the month). The default for this option is NO.
MASTER/SLAVE CHILLER PUMP OPERATION — If the Master/Slave function is active and if the chiller is the lag unit, then the pump will be turned on when the unit is in On mode and if the unit active lag demand limit is greater than 1%. Otherwise, the pump will be stopped 30 seconds after the last compressor is turned off. However, if the lag unit pump has been configured to run even if the unit is commanded to stop (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Lag Unit Pump control = 1) then the above condition will be ignored and the lag pump will run all the time.
CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH STATUS — If Flow Checked if Pump Off (Main Menu Configuration Menu Pump Configuration Flow Checked if Pump Off) is set to YES, the control will monitor the chilled water flow switch status and will send an alarm if the pump is com­manded off and the chilled water flow switch is closed. This can provide the user with information of a faulty evaporator pump contactor or a failed chilled water flow switch. This parameter should be set to NO for series flow machines. The factory default for this item is YES.
MANUAL OPERATION — The evaporator pumps can be forced ON through the CCN when the chiller is off. This al­lows the unit to run with no delay and for an unlimited length of time for flow rate calculations when the unit is in­stalled on site. Manual operation of the pumps is controlled through CCN points CPUMP_1 (Main Menu Pump Sta­tus) and CPUMP_2 (Main Menu Pump Status (0 = OFF, 1 = ON).
Circuit/Compressor Staging and Loading —
The AquaForce® 30XV chillers with Greenspeed® intelli­gence employ one compressor per circuit. As a result, cir­cuit and compressor staging are the same. The control has several control option parameters to load the compressors. The circuit/compressor start can be configured as well as the loading of each circuit/compressor.
CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR STAGING — The control can be configured to decide which circuit/compressor starts first. Three options for this variable are allowed: Automatic Lead-Lag, Circuit A Leads, or Circuit B Leads. The factory default is Automatic Lead-Lag.
The automatic lead-lag function determines which cir­cuit/compressor starts first to even the wear on the compres­sors. The control system determines the lead circuit to equalize the operating time of each circuit (value weighted by the number of start-ups of each circuit). As a result, the circuit with the lowest number of operating hours always starts first. The parameter can also be configured to always start a particular circuit/compressor first.
To configure this option:
DISPLAY NAME PATH
Main Menu
Circuit Priority Sequence
Configuration Menu
General Configuration
LINE
NO.
1 0 = Auto
VALUE
1 = Ckt A Priority 2 = Ckt B Priority
CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR LOADING/UNLOADING — The control uses an equal compressor loading and unload­ing scheme as described below to optimize the efficiency of the unit.
At start-up, the control starts the lead compressor at the lowest frequency and then continues to load it up by in­creasing frequency output of the corresponding VFD. If the load reaches 65% of circuit load, then the control starts the lag compressor at its minimum frequency. While the lag compressor starts to load up, the lead compressor may ramp down to equalize with lag compressor, depending on condi­tions. When the loading of both compressors match, they continue to load up or load down in unison in response to the capacity demand.
In the process of unloading, if both the compressors reach minimum frequency/load level, any further drop in capacity will cause the lag compressor to switch off and the lead compressor to ramp up until load is met again. Eventu­ally with decrease in load the compressor goes down to minimum frequency/load and then shuts down. See Fig. 24 for a graphical representation of initial system loading and unloading. (Figure 24 shows an example of possible com­pressor loading for a given scenario. Since the controls are adaptive, actual loading may vary.)
Dual Chiller Control — The dual chiller function al-
lows for master/slave control of two units installed in parallel or series arrangement supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. The chillers must be linked by the Carrier Comfort Net-
®
work
(CCN) network and operate on the same bus.
When the units are installed for parallel operation and chilled water control is done on the outlet side of the units, the dual chiller accessory kit (P/N 00EFN900044000A) is required. The kit includes additional leaving fluid tempera­ture thermistors that must be installed on the common chilled water leaving piping as described in the Installation Instructions for the kit. The leaving fluid temperature sen­sors will be connected to each chiller as described in the in­stallation instructions. When the chilled water control is done on the inlet side of the parallel units no additional tem­perature sensor is required. See the Field Wiring section in the 30XV Installation Instructions for dual chiller LWT sen­sor control wiring. When chillers are configured to operate in series mode no additional chilled water temperature sen­sor is required.
The master chiller will monitor all external commands such as start/stop, demand limiting or set point select, and needs to be started in Master operating type. The commands are transmitted automatically to the slave unit, which must operate in CCN (Network) mode. The slave chiller has no action in the master/slave operations; it will only verify that CCN communication with the master chiller is correct. If the master chiller is turned off while the master/slave func­tion is active then the slave chiller will be stopped. Under certain circumstances, the slave unit may be started first to balance the run times of the two units. In the event of a com­munication failure between the two units, each unit will re­turn to an autonomous operating mode until the fault is cleared. If the master unit is stopped due to an alarm, the slave unit is authorized to start and therefore the slave unit configurations should be verified with desired set points.
26
Page 27
The CCN communication port for the Master and Slave
Fig. 24 — Initial Compressor Loading/Unloading Method
NOTE: After compressors are fully loaded, they will both load and unload equally with the VFDs (variable frequency drives).
chillers must be joined using a shielded cable in order to avoid communication issues.
The master/slave linkage will not be allowed to operate if any one of the slave chiller CTRL_PNT, DEM_LIM, LAG_LIM, or LCW_STPT variables has a force priority higher than a control force. In that case, the master/slave opera­tions will not be allowed or will be disabled.
The control algorithm relies on several parameters that must be field configured for operation. Both chillers must be on the same CCN bus with different addresses. On both chillers, Mas­ter/Slave Select (Main Menu Configuration Menu Mas­ter Slave config Master/Slave Select) must be enabled (set to 1 or 2). The water piping arrangement must be specified with the Chiller in Series variable (Main Menu Configura­tion Menu Master Slave config Chiller in Series). The Master chiller must be programmed with the Slave Address (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Slave Address). Additional optional programming parame­ters may be configured to meet application requirements.
The Lead Lag Select variable (Main Menu Configura­tion Menu Master Slave config Lead Lag Select) deter­mines which chiller is the lead machine. The options are: Al­ways Lead, Lag Once Failed Only, and Lead/Lag Runtime Se­lect. Under Runtime Select control, the lead chiller will change based on the time increment selected in the Lead/Lag Balance Delta configuration (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Lead/Lag Balance Delta). If the run hour difference between the master and the slave remains less than the Lead/ Lag Balance Delta, the chiller designated as the lead will remain the lead chiller. The Lead/Lag changeover be­tween the master and the slave chiller due to hour balance will occur during chiller operating odd days, such as day 1, day 3, and day 5 of the month, at 12:00 a.m. If a lead chiller is not des­ignated, the master chiller will always be designated the lead chiller.
The dual chiller control algorithm has the ability to delay the start of the lag chiller in two ways. The Lead Pulldown Time parameter (Main Menu Configuration Menu Mas­ter Slave config Lead Pulldown Time) is a one-time time
delay initiated after starting the lead chiller, before checking whether to start an additional chiller. This time delay gives the lead chiller a chance to remove the heat that the chilled water loop picked up while inactive during an unoccupied period. The second time delay, Lead/Lag Start Timer (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Lead/Lag Start Timer) is a time delay imposed between the last stage of the lead chiller and the start of the lag chiller. This prevents en­abling the lag chiller until the lead/lag delay timer has expired.
A quicker start of the lag chiller can be accomplished by configuring the Lag Unit Pump Control parameter (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Lag Unit Pump Control). If the difference between the common leaving water temperature and the set point is greater than the configured value, then the lag chiller will start.
A minimum on time for the lag chiller can be pro­grammed with the Lag Minimum Running Time configura­tion (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Lag Minimum Running Time). This parameter causes the control to run the lag chiller for the programmed minimum On time. The Lag Unit Pump Control (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Lag Unit Pump Control) can be configured such that the pump can be on or off while the chiller is off. This parame­ter is only active in Parallel Chiller Operation.
The lead chiller is started first and the lag chiller will be maintained at zero percent capacity through master forcing the lag demand limit value (LAG_LIM) to 0%. The lag wa­ter pump will be maintained off. When the lead chiller can­not be loaded anymore (because it is loaded at its full avail­able capacity or at the master demand limit value) then the lag start timer is started. When the lag start time has elapsed, if the error on the master controlled set point is greater than the dead band (start_di) and if the pulldown time is elapsed then the lag chiller water pump will be turned on (if required by configuration) and the lag chiller will be allowed to start through the master chiller forcing the lag chiller demand limit value (LAG_LIM) to its own demand limit value. To ensure that the lag chiller will be un­loaded first in case of water load decrease, the lead chiller
27
Page 28
set point error will be reset downwards by 4° F (2.2° C) pro­vided that the lead capacity is not zero.
Each dual chiller application, Parallel and Series, is de-
scribed separately below. DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR PARALLEL APPLI-
CATIONS — To configure the master chiller for parallel applications, see Table 24. To configure the slave chiller for parallel applications, see Table 25.
DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR PARALLEL CHILLER APPLICATIONS — Parallel chiller control with dedicated pumps is recommended. The chiller must start and stop its own water pump located in its own piping. If pumps are not dedicated for each chiller’s piping, chiller isolation valves are required; each chiller must open and close its own isolation valve through the control. Figures 25-28 show typical pump ar­rangements for dual chiller parallel applications.
Although not recommended, it is possible to configure the system with no individual pump control. In applications where the unit is configured for fresh water (Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters, Evaporator Fluid Type=1 [Fresh Water]), and Set Point temperature is close to
the lower limit of the fresh water range, it is possible for changeable leaving water conditions as the chilled water flow rate drops to an operating unit, causing the leaving chilled wa­ter temperature to drop and initiate the evaporator freeze pro­tection override. Constant flow applications may alleviate this issue. In constant water flow applications, the master chiller should be the primary control source for the chilled water pump. The slave chiller should have override capability. In the event of a communication failure between the master and slave chillers, the slave chiller will operate as a stand-alone machine and therefore must be able to enable the chilled water pump.
DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR SERIES CHILLER APPLICATIONS — When chillers are configured to work in series mode no additional chilled water supply sensor is required. The master chiller will be installed downstream of the slave chiller (the slave chiller outlet fluid is the master inlet fluid). If pump control is required, it will be controlled by the master chiller.
To configure the master chiller for series applications, see Table 26. To configure the slave chiller for series applications, see Table 27.
28
Page 29
Table 24 — Dual Master Chiller Control Parameters for Parallel Applications
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Master/Slave Select
Master Control Type
Slave Address
Lead Lag Select
Lead/Lag Balance Delta
Lead/Lag Start Timer
Lead Pulldown Time
Start If Error Higher Lag Minimum Running
Time
Lag Unit Pump Control
Chiller In Series
Main Menu
Configuration Menu Master Slave config
1 (Master) Default: 0 (Disable)
1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control Default: 1(Local) Configure for proper control type.
Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The Master and Slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2
0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag One Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)
Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours
Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes
Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes
Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)
Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes
0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)
No (Not in Series) Default: No
Table 25 — Dual Slave Chiller Control Parameters for Parallel Applications
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Master/Slave Select
Master Control Type
Slave Address
Lead Lag Select
Lead/Lag Balance Delta
Lead/Lag Start Timer
Lead Pulldown Time
Start If Error Higher
Lag Minimum Running Time
Lag Unit Pump Control
Chiller In Series
NOTE: If pump control is configured to OFF (Master), then Lag Unit (Slave) Pump Control= 1. If pump control is set to any other value, then
Main Menu
Configuration Menu Master Slave config
Lag Unit (Slave) Pump Control = 0. This configuration must be set con­sistently for both master and slave chillers.
2 (Slave) Default: 0 (Disable)
1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control Default: 1(Local) Configure for proper control type.
Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2
0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag Once Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)
Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours
Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes
Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes
Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)
Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes
0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)
No (Not in Series) Default: No
29
Page 30
Fig. 25 — Typical Parallel Master/Slave Chillers
Dedicated Primary Pumping, Variable Flow, Leaving Water Control
CONTROL BOX
SLAVE
CHILLER
CONTROL BOX
MASTER CHILLER
LOAD
CHECK VALVES
CHWS TEMP SENSORS
FIELD WIRING FIELD COMMUNICATION WIRING
SLAVE PUMP
MASTER PUMP
NOTE: This is a simplified wiring diagram. Not all hydronic specialties are shown.
Fig. 26 — Typical Parallel Master/Slave Chillers
Common Primary Pumping, Constant Flow, Leaving Water Control
CHWS TEMP SENSORS
ISOLATION VALVES
CONTROL BOX
SLAVE CHILLER
ISOLATION VALVES
FIELD WIRING FIELD COMMUNICATION WIRING
CONTROL BOX
MASTER CHILLER
LOAD
MASTER PUMP
NOTE: This is a simplified wiring diagram. Not all hydronic specialties are shown.
30
Page 31
Fig. 27 — Typical Parallel Master/Slave Chillers
Dedicated Primary Pumping, Variable Flow, Entering Water Control
CONTROL BOX
SLAVE CHILLER
CONTROL BOX
MASTER CHILLER
LOAD
CHECK VALVES
FIELD WIRING FIELD COMMUNICATION WIRING
NOTE: This is a simplified wiring diagram. Not all hydronic specialties are shown.
SLAVE PUMP
MASTER PUMP
Fig. 28 — Typical Parallel Master/Slave Chillers
Common Primary Pumping, Variable Flow, Entering Water Control
CONTROL BOX
SLAVE CHILLER
CONTROL BOX
MASTER CHILLER
LOAD
ISOLATION VALVES
FIELD WIRING FIELD COMMUNICATION WIRING
NOTE: This is a simplified wiring diagram. Not all hydronic specialties are shown.
MASTER PUMP
ISOLATION VALVES
31
Page 32
Table 26 — Master Chiller Configuration in Series Applications
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Master/Slave Select
Master Control Type
Slave Address
Lead Lag Select
Lead/Lag Balance Delta
Lead/Lag Start Timer
Lead Pulldown Time
Start If Error Higher
Lag Minimum Running Time
Lag Unit Pump Control
Chiller In Series
Main Menu
Configuration Menu Master Slave config
1 (Master) Default: 0 (Disable)
1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control Default: 1(Local) Configure for proper control type.
Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The Master and Slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2
0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag One Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)
Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours
Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes
Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes
Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)
Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes
0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)
Yes (In Series) Default: No
Table 27 — Slave Chiller Configuration in Series Applications
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Master/Slave Select
Master Control Type
Slave Address
Lead Lag Select
Lead/Lag Balance Delta
Lead/Lag Start Timer
Lead Pulldown Time
Start If Error Higher
Lag Minimum Running Time
Lag Unit Pump Control
Chiller In Series
NOTES:
1. If pump control is configured to OFF (Master), then LAG UNIT (Slave) PUMP SELECT (page 3 of the Master Slave config menu) = 1. If pump con­trol is set to any other value, then LAG UNIT (Slave) PUMP SELECT = 0. This configuration must be set consistently for both master and slave chillers.
2. For Master/Slave Series Chiller Application, Master Chiller should always be downstream of Slave.
Main Menu
Configuration Menu Master Slave config
2 (Slave) Default: 0 (Disable)
1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control Default: 1(Local) Configure for proper control type.
Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2
0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag Once Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)
Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours
Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes
Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes
Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)
Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes
0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)
Yes (In Series) Default: No
32
Page 33
DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR SERIES
Fig. 29 — Typical Series Master/Slave Chillers
Dedicated Primary Pumping, Constant Flow, Leaving Water Control
CHILLER APPLICATIONS — Pump control for series chiller applications is controlled by the master chiller only. The control of the slave chiller is directed through com­mands emitted by the master chiller. The slave chiller has no action in master/slave operations. The slave chiller only ver­ifies that CCN communication with the master chiller is present. See the Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation section on page 47. Figure 29 shows a typical pump arrangement for dual chiller series applications.
Ramp Loading — The Ramp Loading function limits the
rate of change of the leaving fluid temperature. The minimum compressor speed is calculated based on saturated condensing temperature and saturated suction temperature. To enable the Ramp Loading sequence:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE Ramp Loading
Enable
Cooling Ramp Loading
Main Menu Configuration Menu General Configuration
Main Menu Setpoint Table

Yes
Range: 0.2 to 2.0° F/min (0.1 to 1.1° C/min) Default: 1.0° F/min (0.5 °C/min)
Temperature Reset — The temperature reset function
will determine the cooling control point. This control point is the active set point adjusted with the current reset value:
Control Point = Setpoint + Reset
The purpose of this reset value is to decrease the required capacity if it is allowed by unit load operating conditions. When a non-zero temperature reset is applied, the chiller con­trols to the new control point instead of the set point. The type of temperature reset is configured with the Cooling Reset Se­lect variable. Four types of temperature reset are available:
Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT), Return Water Reset (Delta T), 4-20mA control, and Space Temperature control:
DISPLAY
NAME
Cooling Reset Select
Main Menu Configuration Menu Reset Configuration
PATH VALUE
0 = None 1 = OAT 2 = Delta T 3 = 4-20 mA Control 4 = Space Temp
Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a con­stant entering or leaving fluid temperature, based on the configuration, approximately equal to the chilled fluid set point. As the evaporator load varies, the evaporator fluid temperature difference will change in proportion to the load. For example, if the chiller was selected for an entering to leaving water temperature difference of 10° F (5.5° C) at full load, at 50% load the temperature difference would be 5° F (2.2° C). See Fig. 30. Because the change in tempera­ture through the evaporator is a measure of the building load, the temperature difference reset is the average build­ing load. Usually the chiller size and fluid temperature set point are selected based on a full load condition. At part load, the fluid temperature set point may be lower than re­quired. When the fluid temperature is allowed to increase at part load, the efficiency of the machine will increase. The chiller can also be set for return water temperature control. See Fig. 31.
Other indirect means of estimating building load and controlling temperature reset are also available and are dis­cussed below.
To verify that reset is functioning correctly, subtract the Current Setpoint (Main Menu General Parameters Cur­rent Setpoint) from the Control Point (Main Menu General Parameters Control Point) to determine the degrees reset.
BYPASS LOOP
CONTROL BOX
SLAVE CHILLER
MASTER PUMP
FIELD WIRING FIELD COMMUNICATION WIRING
CONTROL BOX
MASTER CHILLER
ISOLATION VALVES
LOAD
NOTE: This is a simplified wiring diagram. Not all hydronic specialties are shown.
33
Page 34
04
24
44
64
84
05
25
45
65
0010908070605040302010
LOADING (%)
FLUID TEMPERATURE (deg F)
DESIGN RISE (TYPICAL)
LWT
EWT
Fig. 30 — Leaving Chilled Water Temperature Control
a30-4066
56
Fig. 31 — Return Water Temperature Control Load Profile
a30-4478
54
52
50
48
EWT
LWT
DESIGN RISE (TYPICAL)
46
FLUID TEMPERATURE (deg F)
44
42
40
LOADING %
1009080706050403020100
34
Page 35
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE RESET — The control
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
Outdoor Temperature (deg F)
Reset Amount (deg F)
Cooling Reset
Deg. Value
= 15 F (8.3 C)
(cr_deg)
OAT No Reset Value
= 85 F (29.4 C)
(oat_hrno)
OAT Full Reset Value
= 55 F (12.8 C)
(oat_hrfu)
20 40 60 80 100 120 0
a30-5887
Fig. 32 — Example: OAT Temperature Reset
system is capable of temperature reset based on outdoor-air temperature (OAT). Typically as the outdoor temperature de­creases so does building cooling load. The chilled water tem­perature can be increased to lower energy usage while still meeting load demand.
To use Outdoor Air Temperature Reset, four variables must be configured: Cooling Reset Select, OAT No Reset Value (outdoor temperature at which no reset is required), OAT Full Reset Value (outdoor temperature at which full reset is re­quired), and Cooling Reset Deg Value (the amount of tempera­ture reset desired).
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Cooling Reset Select
0=None, 1=OAT 2=Delta T, 3=4-20mA control 4=Space Temp
OAT No Reset Value
OAT Full Reset Value
Cooling Reset Deg. Value
Main Menu Configuration Menu Reset Configuration
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 4 F (2.2 C)
Low = 14 F (7.8 C) Default = 14 F (7.8 C) High = 125 F (69.4 C)
Low = 14 F (7.8 C) Default = 14 F (7.8 C) High = 125 F (69.4 C)
Low = 30 F (16.7 C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 30 F (16.6 C)
In the example in Fig. 32, the outdoor air temperature reset provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85 F (29.4 C) outdoor-air temperature and 15° F (8.3° C) reset at 55 F (12.8 C) outdoor-air temperature.
35
Page 36
DELTA T RESET (RETURN WATER RESET) — The
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
ENTERING-LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE (deg F)
DEGREES RESET (deg F)
Cooling
Reset
Deg. Value
(cr_deg)
Delta T No Reset Temp
(dt_hr_no)
Delta T Full Reset Temp
(dt_hr_fu)
2 4
6 8
10
a30-5886
Fig. 33 — Example: Return Water Reset
control system is also capable of performing fluid temperature reset based on evaporator fluid temperature difference (Delta T), sometimes called return water reset. Because the change in temperature through the evaporator is a measure of the building load, the temperature difference reset is, in effect, an average building load reset method.
Delta T Reset allows for the chilled water temperature set point to be reset upward as a function of the fluid temperature difference (building load).
NOTE: Delta T (Return Water) Temperature Reset should not be used with variable evaporator flow rate systems.
To use Delta T Reset, four variables must be configured: Cooling Reset Select, Delta T No Reset Value (evaporator tem­perature difference at which no chilled water temperature reset should occur), Delta T Full Reset Value (evaporator tempera­ture difference at which the maximum chilled water tempera­ture reset should occur), and Cooling Reset Deg Value (the maximum amount of temperature reset desired).
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot
DISPLAY
NAME
Cooling Reset Select
0=None, 1=OAT 2=Delta T, 3=4-20mA control 4=Space Temp
Delta T No Reset Temp
Delta T Full Reset Temp
Cooling Reset Deg Value
Main Menu Configuration Menu Reset Configuration
PATH VALUE
™
display:
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 4 F (2.2 C)
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 25 F (13.8 C)
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 25 F (13.8 C)
Low = 30 F (16.7 C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 30 F (16.6 C)
In the example in Fig. 33 using Return Water Temperature Reset, the chilled water temperature will be reset by 5° F (2.8° C) when the Fluid Temperature Difference is 2° F (1.1° C) and 0° F (0° C) reset when the Temperature Difference is 10° F (5.6° C).
36
Page 37
4-20 mA TEMPERATURE RESET — The control system is
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0101420
mA Signal
Degrees Reset (deg F)
2
Cooling Reset
Deg. Value
(cr_deg)
Current No Reset Value
(v_hr_no)
Current Full Reset Value
(v_hr_fu)
46 8
12 16 18
a30-5885
Fig. 34 — Example: 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset
also capable of temperature reset based on an externally pow­ered 4 to 20 mA signal. The Energy Management Module (EMM) is required for temperature reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal.
To use 4-20 mA Temperature Reset, four variables must be configured: Cooling Reset Select, Current No Reset Value (milliamp signal at which no temperature reset is required), Current Full Reset Value (milliamp signal at which full tem­perature reset is required), and Cooling Reset Deg Value (the maximum amount of temperature reset desired).
CAUTION
Care should be taken when interfacing with other control systems due to possible power supply differences such as a full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connec­tion of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. Touch Pilot controls incorpo­rate power supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Cooling Reset Select
0=None, 1=OAT 2=Delta T, 3=4-20mA control 4=Space Temp
Current No Reset Value
Current Full Reset Value
Cooling Reset Deg Value
Main Menu Configuration Menu Reset Configuration
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 4 F (2.2 C)
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C)) High = 20 F (11.1 C)
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 20 F (11.1 C)
Low = 30 F (16.7 C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 30 F (16.6 C)
In the example in Fig. 34, at 4 mA no reset takes place and
at 20 mA, 5° F (2.8° C) chilled water set point reset is required.
37
Page 38
SPACE TEMPERATURE RESET — The control system is
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
60 65 70 75 80
Space Temperature (deg F)
Degrees Reset (deg F)
Cooling Reset
Deg. Value
(cr_deg)
Space T Full Reset Value
(spahr_fu)
Space T No Reset Value
(spahr_no)
a30-5884
Fig. 35 — Example: Space Temperature Reset
also capable of temperature reset based on space temperature. The energy management module (EMM) and accessory sensor (P/N 33ZCT55SPT) are required for temperature reset using space temperature. This sensor measures the space (room) tem­perature for the purpose of set point reset. Only units with the optional energy management module are fitted with this sensor.
To use Space Temperature Reset, four variables must be configured: Cooling Reset Select, Space T No Reset Value (space temperature at which no temperature reset is required), Space T Full Reset Value (space temperature at which full tem­perature reset is required), and Cooling Reset Deg Value (the maximum amount of temperature reset desired).
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Cooling Reset Select
0=None, 1=OAT 2=Delta T, 3=4-20mA control 4=Space Temp
Space T No Reset Value
Space T Full Reset Value
Cooling Reset Deg Value
Main Menu Configuration Menu Reset Configuration
Low = 0° F (0° C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 4 F (2.2 C)
Low = 14 F (7.8 C) Default = 14 F (7.8 C) High = 125 F (69.4 C)
Low = 14 F (7.8 C) Default = 14 F (7.8 C) High = 125 F (69.4 C)
Low = 30 F (16.7 C) Default = 0° F (0° C) High = 30 F (16.6 C)
In the space temperature reset example in Fig. 35, a reset of 6° F (3.3° C) is applied when the space temperature is 68 F (20.0 C) and no reset takes place when the space temperature is 72 F (22.2 C).
Demand Limit — There are three types of demand limit-
ing that can be configured. The first type is through switch con­trol, which will reduce the maximum capacity to up to 3 user­configurable percentages. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to
the user-configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed module and has the ability to lim­it the current operating capacity to maximum and further re­duce the capacity if required. Demand limit control can be based on a calculated capacity level.
SWITCH CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT — The con­trol system is capable of demand limit based on a field-sup­plied switch for 1-step demand limit or 2 switches for 3-step demand limit. One-step demand limit is standard. The 3-step switch control of demand limiting requires the energy manage­ment module (EMM). Demand limit steps are controlled by two relay switch inputs field wired to TB5-5 and TB5-6 for Switch 1 (LIM_SW1) and TB6-14 and TB6-15 for Switch 2 (LIM_SW2).
For demand limit by switch control, closing the first de­mand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand limit level by capacity. The unit will not exceed the percentage of ca­pacity entered as demand limit switch 1 set point. Closing con­tacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from exceeding the demand limit entered as demand limit switch 2 set point. If both demand limit switch contacts are closed the unit will not exceed the limits set by the switch limit set point 3. See the table below.
CONTACT
LIM_SW1 Open Close Open Close LIM_SW2 Open Open Close Close
NONE LIMIT 1 LIMIT 2 LIMIT 3
ACTIVE DEMAND LIMIT
If the demand limit percentage is set below minimum unit operation, the unit will go into override mode. See Override #91: Demand Limit section on page 42.
To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to use by configuring the Demand Limit Select variable (Main Menu Configuration Menu  General Configuration Demand Limit Type Select) to Switch. Configure the demand limit set points based on the type selected.
38
Page 39
Switch Controlled
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
12 14 16 18
20
mA Demand Limit Signal
% Demand Limit
0
2
4 6
8 10
mA for Demand Limit = 100%
(lim_mx)
mA for Demand Limit = 0%
(lim_ze)
a30-5883
Fig. 36 — Example: 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit
— If using 2 or 3-step demand limit con­trol, an energy management module must be installed. One­step demand limit control does not require the energy manage­ment module. To configure demand limit for switch control, three parameters for 1-step switch control must be configured. For 2 or 3-step control, additional set point parameters must be configured. The parameters are: the type of Demand Limit Se­lection, the setting for Switch Limit Setpoint 1, the setting for Switch Limit Setpoint 2 (if required) and the setting for Switch Limit Setpoint 3 (if required).
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Demand Limit Type Select
Switch Limit Setpoint 1
Switch Limit Setpoint 2
Switch Limit Setpoint 3
Main Menu Configuration Menu General Configuration
Main Menu Setpoint Table
Main Menu Setpoint Table
Main Menu Setpoint Table
1 (Switch) Low = 0 Default = 0 (None) High = 4
Low = 0% Default = 100% High = 100%
Low = 0% Default = 100% High = 100% (Not required for 1-Step Control)
Low = 0% Default = 100% High = 100% (Not required for 1 or 2-Step Control)
In the following example, 2-step demand limit based on capacity is desired with the first switch closure limiting the capacity to 60%. The second switch closure is to limit the ca­pacity to 40%. Demand Limit Switch 1 is 60% and Demand Limit Switch 2 is 40%. Since no third-step demand limit is re­quired, Switch Limit Setpoint 3 is set at 0%.
DISPLAY NAME VALUE Demand Limit Type Select 1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 60% Switch Limit Setpoint 2 40% Switch Limit Setpoint 3 0%
EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 to 20 mA) DEMAND LIMIT — The energy management module is required for 4 to 20 mA demand limit control. An externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal must be connected to TB6-1 and TB6-2. Typically the 4 to 20mA signal is provided by an active outdoor sensor connected to this input. This signal is read by a transducer type (0 to 5 vdc) on the EMM board via a field-installed 0.5 W 250-ohm resistor.
CAUTION
Care should be taken when interfacing with other control systems due to possible power supply differences such as a full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connec­tion of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. Touch Pilot controls incorpo­rate power supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.
Externally Powered (4 to 20 mA) Current Based Demand Limit — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control based on unit capacity, one parameter must be configured. The parameter is Demand Limit Type Select. The value of the capacity limit will vary linearly for 0% to 100% based on the input signal where 4 mA is 100% and 20 mA is 0% of total unit capacity.
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Demand Limit Type Select
Main Menu Configuration Menu  General Configuration
In the example in Fig. 36, a 4 mA signal is Demand Limit 100% and a 20 mA Demand Limit signal is 0%. The 4 to 20 mA signal is connected to TB6-1 and TB6-2. The demand limit is a linear interpolation between the two val­ues entered. If the machine receives a 12 mA signal, the machine controls will limit the capacity to 50%.
2 (4-20mA Control) (Default = 0 [None])
39
Page 40
CCN LOADSHED CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT — To
DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT
Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT
ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS™
TeLink
Unused
BACLink or DataLINK™
Unused
Fig. 37 — Alarm Routing Control
configure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control, the unit Op­erating Type Control must be in CCN control. With the Touch Pi­lot™ display, the machine must be started in Network Mode. Network control can be executed from the GENUNIT table.
The unit must be controlled by a Chillervisor module. The Chillervisor module can force the demand limit variable and directly control the capacity of the machine. Additionally, the unit’s set point will be artificially lowered to force the chiller to load to the demand limit value.
Ice Storage Operation — Chiller operation can be
configured to make and store ice. The energy management module and an Ice Done Switch are required for operation in the Ice Mode. In this configuration, the machine can operate with up to three cooling set points: Cooling Setpoint 1 is used during the Occupied period, Cooling Setpoint 2 is used during the Unoccupied period when the ice build is complete (Ice Done Switch is closed), and Cooling Ice Setpoint is used during the unoccupied period while ice is building (Ice Done Switch is open). Refer to the 30XV Typical Field Wiring Sche­matic figure on page 117 for Ice Done Switch wiring.
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE
Ice Mode Enable
Cooling Ice Setpoint
Broadcast Configuration — The 30XV chiller with
Greenspeed
Main Menu Configuration Menu General Configuration
Main Menu Setpoint Table
®
intelligence is capable of broadcasting out­side-air temperature (OAT), time, date, and holiday status to all elements in the CCN system. In the stand-alone mode, broadcast must be activated to utilize holiday schedules and adjust for daylight saving time. If the chiller is to be con­nected to a CCN system, determine which system element is to be the network broadcaster and activate broadcast in all other system elements. Broadcast is activated and deactivat­ed in the Touch Pilot Broadcast Menu (Main Menu Con­figuration Menu Broadcast Menu Brocasts).
Only one element should be configured as a broadcaster. If a broadcast is activated by a device that has been designated as a network broadcaster, then broadcast time, date, and holiday status will be updated over the CCN system. If broadcast is en­abled, a broadcast acknowledger must also be enabled. The ac­knowledger cannot be the same machine as the broadcasting machine.
ACTIVATE — The Activate variable enables the broadcast function of the Touch Pilot controls. If this variable is set to 0, this function is not used and holiday schedules and daylight savings compensation are not possible. Setting this variable to 1 allows the machine to broadcast and receive broadcasts on the network. The following information is broadcast: the time


Radio button (YES/NO) Default = No
Low = –20 F (–29 C) Default = 44 F (6.7 C) High = 78.8 F (26 C)
with compensation for daylight savings, date, holiday flag, and the outdoor-air temperature.
Set this variable to 2 for stand-alone OAT broadcast. With this configuration, daylight saving time and holiday determina­tion will be done without broadcasting through the bus.
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot
DISPLAY
NAME

Activate

Main Menu Configuration Menu Broadcast Menu Brocasts
PATH VALUE

0 = Disabled 1 = Broadcast time, date, holiday flag, and OAT 2 = OAT broadcast only (Daylight savings time and holiday determination will be done without broadcasting through the bus)
™
display:
OAT BROADCAST — To enable the outside air temperature (OAT) broadcast, the unit broadcasting the temperature must be configured with its own CCN Bus and CCN Address. Leav­ing the parameters at the factory default of 0 for the CCN Bus and CCN Address disables the OAT Broadcast function. Once configured, the first broadcast of OAT will be within 5 minutes.
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE Activate OAT Broadcast Bus #
Element #
Main Menu Configuration Menu Broadcast Menu Brocasts

Range = 0 to 2 Default = 2
Range = 0 to 239 Default = 0
Range = 0 to 239 Default = 0
BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER — This configuration defines if the chiller will be used to acknowledge broadcast messages on the CCN bus. One broadcast acknowledger is re­quired per bus, including secondary buses created by the use of a bridge. The broadcast acknowledger must be configured through the Network Service Tool.

Alarm Control

ALARM ROUTING CONTROL — Alarms recorded on the chiller can be routed through the CCN. To configure this op­tion, the Touch Pilot controls must be configured to determine which CCN elements will receive and process alarms. Input for the decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Set­ting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory de­fault is 00000000. See Fig. 37. The default setting is based on the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a network. If the network does not contain a ComfortVIEW™, Comfort­WORKS abling this feature will only add unnecessary activity to the CCN communication bus.
™
, TeLink, DataLINK™, or BACLink module, en-
40
Page 41
Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is
11010000. This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to ComfortVIEW
™
software, TeLink, BACLink, and DataLINK.
This option cannot be configured with the Touch Pilot dis­play. To change the alarm control routing through the Network Service Tool, navigate to point ALRM_CNT in table ALARMDEF.
ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY — The ComfortVIEW software uses the equipment priority value when sorting alarms by level. The purpose of the equipment priority value is to de­termine the order in which to sort alarms that have the same level. A priority of 0 is the highest and would appear first when sorted. A priority of 7 would appear last when sorted. For ex­ample, if two chillers send out identical alarms, the chiller with the higher priority would be listed first. The default is 4. This variable can only be changed when using the ComfortVIEW software, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Touch Pilot display. To configure this option with the Network Service Tool, navigate to point EQ-_TYP in table ALARMDEF.
COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME — This vari­able specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is not ac­knowledged by a network alarm acknowledger, which may use either ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If acknowledgment is not received, the alarm will be re-transmitted after the number of minutes specified in this decision. This variable can only be changed when using the ComfortVIEW software, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Touch Pilot display. To configure this option with the Network Service Tool, navigate to point RET-Y_TM in table ALARMDEF.
RE-ALARM TIME — This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between re-alarms. A re­alarm occurs when the conditions that caused the initial alarm continue to persist for the number of minutes specified in this decision. Re-alarming will continue to occur at the specified in­terval until the condition causing the alarm is corrected. This variable can only be changed when using the ComfortVIEW software, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Touch Pilot display. To configure this option with the Network Service Tool, navigate to point RE-_LARM in table ALARMDEF.
ALARM SYSTEM NAME — This variable specifies the system element name that will appear in the alarms generated by the unit control. The name can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters in length. This variable can only be changed when using the ComfortVIEW™ software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Touch Pilot display. To configure this option with the Network Service Tool, navi­gate to point ALRM_NAM in table ALARMDEF.
Daylight Savings Time Configuration — The
30XV chiller with Greenspeed
®
intelligence control con­tains software which can automatically correct for daylight saving time. This software is accessible from the Touch Pi­lot™ display, ComfortVIEW software, or Network Service Tool.
To enable this feature, Daylight Saving Select must be set to
1. The start of daylight saving must be configured by setting the Month, Day of Week, and Week of Month. The end for Daylight Saving must also be configured. To configure this op­tion with the Touch Pilot display, see Table 28.
Table 28 — Daylight Saving Time Configuration
DISPLAY NAME PATH VALUE Activate Daylight
Savings Select Entering
Month
Day of Week (1=Monday)
Week of Month
Leaving
Month
Day of Week (1=Monday)
Week of Month
Main Menu Configuration Menu Broadcast Menu Brocasts

1 or 2 Default = 2
Enable Default = Dsble
Enter Starting Month for Daylight Saving
Enter the Day of the Week Daylight Saving Starts
Enter Week of the Month Daylight Saving Starts
Enter Ending Month for Daylight Saving
Enter the Day of the Week Daylight Saving ends
Enter Week of the Month Daylight Saving ends
Capacity Control Overrides — The following ca-
pacity control overrides (Main Menu Maintenance Menu Capacity Control Override Capacity A, B) will modify the normal operation routine. If any of the override conditions list­ed below is satisfied, the override will determine the capacity change instead of the normal control. Overrides are listed by priority order and are often linked to unit operating modes. See Table 29 for a list of capacity control overrides. See the Operat­ing Modes section on page 48 for more information regarding operating modes.
Override #2: Low Suction Pressure vated when the EXV is not in DSH mode and the suction satu­ration temperature (SST) goes below 13.25 F (–10.4 C) for wa­ter or below (13.25 – (34 – Brine Freeze Setpoint)) for units configured with brine. The controller at this point starts to un­load the unit until the SST exceeds 34 F (1.1 C).
Override #6: EWT < Control Point compressors without alarms.
Override #7: Ramp Loading made if the unit is configured for ramp loading and the rate of change of the leaving water is greater than Ramp Loading Rate.
Override #9: Demand Limit when a command to limit the capacity is received and the ca­pacity meets or exceeds the demand limit value. If the current unit capacity is greater than the active capacity limit value, the unit unloads per unloading scheme. The current capacity will stop increasing when it reaches the capacity limit value minus 3%.
Override #10: Flow Switch is Open its compressor operation until the Evaporator flow switch is closed.
Override #11: Customer Interlock is Closed prohibits compressor operation until the customer interlock is opened.
Override #12: Flow Available Delay hibits chiller operation until flow has started.
— This override is acti-
—This override stops the
— No capacity increase will be
— This override mode is active
— This override prohib-
— This override
— This override pro-
41
Page 42
Override #14: Low LWT (Leaving Water Temperature
) — This override stops the compressors if LWT < freeze + freeze_ov (freeze = Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters Brine Freeze Setpoint; freeze_ov = Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters Freeze Override Offset). The goal is to stop the unit without having an alarm if the LWT goes too low so that the unit can start automatically without the need to reset alarm. For example, freeze is 34 F (1.1 C); the user can decide to add a threshold to force the compressors to stop immediate­ly without alarm at 35 F (1.7 C).
Override #15: Compressor Disabled
— This override is shown when either of the compressors are disabled through Main Menu Configuration Menu  Compressor Enable menu.
Override #16: High Discharge Pressure
— This override at­tempts to avoid a high pressure failure. If the saturated con­densing temperature for the circuit is above the high pressure threshold the compressor is unloaded while the fan is run at maximum frequency.
Override #23: Low SP (Suction Pressure)
— When the unit is configured with evaporator fluid as water (Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters Evaporator Fluid Type), this override gets activated at suction pressure (SP) < 27.7 psig (191 kPa) minus 5 psig (34.5 kPa). In this mode the circuit will not be allowed to load further until the SST goes above 30 F (
–1.1 C). When the unit is configured
with evaporator fluid as brine (Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters Evaporator Fluid Type), this override gets activated at suction pressure (SP) < Brine Freeze Setpoint (converted to psig) (Main Menu Config­uration Menu Service Parameters Brine Freeze Set­point) minus 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
Override #34: Low SST (Saturated Suction Temperature
) — The compressor is not allowed to start if the SST is lower than –13 F (–25 C).
Override #53: ON OFF Delay
— This override is activated when the unit is in off state (manually stopped or because of alarm shutdown) and is requested to start through Local On, Remote On, CCN On or after alarm shutdown reset.
Override #56: Isolation Valve Opening Delay
— This over­ride mode is activated when the actuated ball valves (if equipped) on the discharge lines are opening (approxi­mately 2-minute delay).
Override #59: Low Oil Level
— This override is only effec­tive when the circuit is not running. The override will prevent the circuit from starting up with a low oil level.
Override #62: High Compressor Motor Temperature
— This override prevents the compressor motor temperature from rising above the high temperature limit, but still allows the chiller to run close to the high temperature limit by un­loading the compressor. If the motor temperature is greater than 195.8 F (91 C), the compressor will not load. This override will control the loading to the compressor to main­tain a maximum motor temperature of 194 F (90 C). The circuit will come out of this mode if the motor temperature falls below 190.4 F (88 C) or if motor temperature is below
195.8 F (91 C) and water temperature is established. Override #66: High Discharge Gas Temperature
(DGT) — This override avoids high DGT tripout by either increasing compressor capacity or decreasing the capacity and stop­ping the compressor depending on the conditions. The in­crease in capacity happens when the DGT > 201 F (93.9 C) to lower DGT. The control seeks to control the DGT at 190 F and if the DGT goes below 186.4 F (85.8 C) the unit goes to normal control. The decrease in capacity followed by unit stop happens if Override 66 is activated and evapo­rator leaving water temperature is close to the freeze point or lower than the control point. The compressor restarts if
the DGT goes below 186.4 F (85.8 C) and more than 5 min­utes have passed. This override has priority over almost ev­ery other one (including the Demand Limit override).
Override #67: DGT off Protection (Discharge Gas Tempera­ture) — This override is activated before the unit starts and prevents the unit from starting if the DGT is still greater than DGT activation point or if 5 minutes has not passed since the last high DGT shutdown.
Override #77: Oil Pressure at Start
— This override is acti­vated when the unit has just started passed the start timer and OP<(SP+19.5) AND OP<(0.7*(DP-SP)+SP).
In this override the unit freezes the compressor loading and waits until the oil pressure exceeds the above conditions and then exits to normal mode of operation.
Override #91: Demand Limit
— This override is activated when the demand limit is set lower than the minimum possi­ble unit capacity. The unit shuts down and/or is on hold until the demand limit is changed to higher than the minimum unit capacity.
Table 29 — Capacity Control Overrides
NO. DESCRIPTION
0 Normal Operation 2 Low Suction Pressure 6 EWT < control point 7 Ramp Loading
9 Demand Limit Reached 10 Flow switch is open 11 Customer Interlock is closed 12 Flow Available Delay 14 Low LWT 15 Compressor Disabled 16 High Discharge Pressure 23 Low SP 34 Low SST 53 ON OFF Delay 56 Evaporator Heater Isolation Valve Opening Delay 59 Low Oil Level 62 High Compressor Motor Temperature 66 High Discharge Gas Temperature 67 DGT Off Protection 77 Oil Pressure at Start 91 Demand Limit
Head Pressure Control (Variable Speed Fans) — The head pressure is controlled through the Touch
Pilot display by adjusting fan speed through variable speed drive(s). The command sent to the drive is at a frequency to maintain the lowest condensing temperature possible, and thus, the highest unit efficiency. The frequency command sent is based on a function of compressor capacity, OAT, and leaving fluid temperature. If the capacity is stable and no overrides have occurred recently, an algorithm attempts to optimize fan frequency based on total power feedback. The optimization control can be turned on and off through the Network Service Tool (Service Fan_CFG Optimization Enable On, Off [xt_enable]). By default the xt_enable variable is “On” which means the optimization control is active. It can be set to “Off” to deactivate the optimization. The frequency adjustment during optimization control can be adjusted through the vari­able os_d_amp (Service Fan_CFG Opt Disturbance Ampl. (Hz) [os_d_amp]). By default os_d_amp is 5 Hz and can be lowered to 3 Hz if the unit load demand is very steady. Lowering the frequency below 3 Hz is not recommended and could cause head pressure control instability, causing load and power draw oscillations. All the other optimization parameters in table (Service Fan_CFG) are not recommended for change, however are explained briefly. The Stability Sample
42
Page 43
Nb is the number of samples the controller uses to determine if unit is stable. One sample is taken per second. Optimization Deviation Tolerance is the percentage change in the capacity which will trigger the controls to get out of optimization and re­optimize. The Optimization Disturbance Period is the time it waits after fan frequency adjustment to determine if the unit is optimized or needs further iteration. Optimization Freeze Pow­er Tolerance is the Power delta tolerance to determine if the op­timum is met or not. If power change is lower than that with fan frequency change then it is considered as an optimal point. The Optimization filter time is the filter time of the fan power to eliminate power measurement noise.
Fan control continuously monitors all inputs and outputs and the transitions between the modes are defined based on continuous measurements of 2 inputs (Discharge Pressure and Discharge Gas Temperature). Fan modes of operation include the following:
• STANDARD: Normal mode of operation before using
the optimum-seeking algorithm.
• WAITOPT, OPTIMZE: Trying to optimize the fan fre-
quency during the optimum-seeking algorithm.
• FREEZE: Fan frequencies are frozen after completion of
the optimum-seeking algorithm cycle. The fan control
remains in this mode until the LWT, the compressor load,
or the outdoor temperature changes by a defined amount.
If the change conditions are met the fan control goes
back to the WAITOPT mode followed by the OPTIMZE
modes.
• DGT: High Discharge Gas Temperature mode. The VFD
increases the speed of the fan to reduce DGT.
• DP_HIGH, DP_LOW: High Discharge Pressure Mode,
Low Discharge Pressure Mode: The VFD controls the
speed of the fan to bring SCT into normal operating
range.
• OFF: Fans are not running.
• START: Start mode. The frequency of the fans is defined
based on the OAT.
Head Pressure Control (Fixed Speed Fans) — The head pressure is controlled through the
Touch Pilot display by adjusting the number of fans run­ning. The controller determines the minimum number of fans required to support unit operation so the unit can run at the most efficient point. At start up the number of fans on is calculated using OAT. After 60 seconds, an equation is used to determine the number of fan required based on OAT, EWT, and circuit capacity.
There are additional modes used for fixed speed fans: DP High — Mode decreases the discharge pressure as fast
as possible to prevent high pressure trips. This mode turns on all fans.
DP High Discharge Pressure — Mode avoids high dis­charge pressure that would cause the compressor to run out­side of the compressor envelope. In this mode, the pressure is controlled to a Discharge Pressure set point.
DGT High — Mode decreases the discharge temperature as fast a possible to prevent high DGT alarms. This mode turns on all fans.

PRE-START-UP

IMPORTANT: Complete the Start-Up Checklist for 30XV Liquid Chillers at the end of this publication.
The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record of unit condition, application requirements, system information, and operation at initial start-up.
Do not attempt to start the chiller until the following checks
have been completed.

System Check

1. Check that auxiliary components, such as the chilled fluid circulating pump, air-handling equipment, or oth­er equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid are operational. Consult manufacturer’s instructions. If the unit has field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.
2. Open compressor suction service valves (if equipped).
3. Open discharge line, liquid line, oil line, and economizer (if equipped) service valves.
4. Fill the chiller fluid circuit with clean water (with recom­mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to be cooled. Bleed all air out of high points of system. If out­door temperatures are expected to be below 32 F (0° C), sufficient inhibited propylene glycol or other suitable cor­rosion inhibited antifreeze should be added to the chiller water circuit to prevent possible freeze-up.
The chilled water loop must be cleaned before the unit is connected. It is recommended that the chiller pumps be equipped with a start-up filter screen to remove particu­lates from the loop. The start-up filter should be replaced after 24 hours of operation
5. Check tightness of all electrical connections.
6. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.
7. Oil separator heaters must be energized for 24 hours prior to start-up.

START-UP

Actual Start-Up —
under supervision of a qualified refrigeration technician.
1. Be sure all oil, suction valves, discharge valves (if equipped) and liquid line service valves are open.
2. Using the Touch Pilot control, set leaving-fluid set point (Main Menu Setpoint Table Cooling Setpoint 1). No cooling range adjustment is necessary.
3. If optional control functions or accessories are being used, the unit must be properly configured. Refer to Configuration Options section for details.
4. Start the chilled fluid pump, if unit is not configured for pump control (Main Menu Configuration Menu Pump Configuration Evaporator Pumps Sequence = 0).
5. Complete the Start-Up Checklist to verify all components are operating properly.
6. Press the Start/Stop button located in the upper right corner of the Touch Pilot display and then select Local On.
7. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is func­tioning properly. After unit operation stabilizes, check to see that leaving set-point Control Point (Main Menu Setpoint Table Cooling Setpoint 1) agrees with leaving fluid temperature (Main Menu Temperatures Evap Leaving Fluid).
Actual start-up should be done only
43
Page 44

Operating Limitations

TEMPERATURES — Unit operating temperature limits are listed in the table below.
TEMPERATURE F C Maximum Ambient Temperature 125 52 Minimum Ambient Temperature* 32 0 Maximum Evaporator EWT† 95 35 Maximum Evaporator LWT 60 15 Minimum Evaporator LWT 38** 3.3
LEGEND
EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature
* Lowest allowable ambient temperature for the standard unit to start and operate is 32 F (0° C). With the inclusion of wind baffles and vari­able speed fans (field fabricated and installed), the unit is capable to start as low as 0 F (–17.8 C) and to operate as low as –20 F (–29 C) ambient temperature.
†For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 70 F (21.1 C). **Unit requires brine fluid for operation below this temperature.
Low Ambient Temperature Operation — If unit operating temperatures below 32 F (0° C) are expected, the following measures are recommended:
• Consider higher loop volumes, 6 to 10 gallons per nomi-
nal ton.
• Loop freeze protection with glycol is strongly recom-
mended to a minimum of 15° F (8.3° C) below lowest anticipated ambient temperature.
• Chilled water pump control is required.
• If wind velocity is expected to be greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h) wind baffles and brackets must be field-fabri­cated and installed. See the 30XV Installation Instruc-
tions for more information. VOLTAGE Main Power Supply
supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions. Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage
motor where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.
To determine percent voltage imbalance:
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average across all 3 legs.
Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.
AB = 243v
BC = 236v
AC = 238v
— Minimum and maximum acceptable
— Never operate a
max voltage deviation from
avg voltage
average voltage
1. Determine average voltage:
Average voltage =
243+236+238
717
=
3
3
= 239
2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage: (AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v
(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v (AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v
Maximum deviation is 4 v.
3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
4
239
= 1.7%
This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maximum allowable of 2%.
IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbal­ance is more than 2%, contact the local electric utility company immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition is corrected.
MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME — To obtain proper temperature control, loop fluid volume must be at least 3 gal­lons per ton (3.25 L per kW) of chiller nominal capacity for air conditioning and at least 6 gallons per ton (6.5 L per kW) for process applications or systems that must operate at low ambi­ent temperatures (below 32 F [0° C]). Refer to application in­formation in Product Data literature for details.
FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS — Standard chillers should be applied with nominal flow rates within those listed in the Minimum and Maximum Evaporator Flow Rates table. Higher or lower flow rates are permissible to obtain lower or higher temperature rises. Minimum flow rates must be exceed­ed to assure turbulent flow and proper heat transfer in the evap­orator. See Table 30. See Fig. 38 and 39 for evaporator pressure drop curves.
CAUTION
Operation below minimum flow rate could generate alarms, which could result in damage to the evaporator.
Consult application data section in the Product Data lit­erature and job design requirements to determine flow rate requirements for a particular installation.
44
Page 45
Table 30 — 30XV Minimum and Maximum Evaporator Flow Rates
ITEM MINIMUM MAXIMUM NORMAL
Evaporator Leaving Water Temperature* 40 F (4.4 C) 60 F (15 C) —
Evaporator Entering Water Temperature† 45 F (7.2 C) 70 F (21.1 C) —
30XV Unit Size Tier Evaporator
Std
140
High
Std
160
180
200
225
250
275
300
325
*For applications requiring evaporator leaving water temperature operation at less than 40 F (4.4 C), the units require the use of anti­freeze. Contact your local Carrier representative for more information. †For applications requiring evaporator entering water temperature operation at less than 45 F (7.2 C), contact your local Carrier repre­sentative for unit selection using the Carrier electronic catalog.
Mid
High
Std Mid
High
Std Mid
High
Std Mid
High
Std Mid
High
Std Mid
High
Std Mid
High
Std
High
Standard 2 170.4 10.8 681.6 43.0 340.8 21.5Mid
Standard 2 193.2 12.2 772.8 48.8 386.4 24.4
Standard 2 204 12.9 816 51.5 408 25.7
Standard 2 236.4 14.9 945.6 59.7 472.8 29.8
Standard 2 266.4 16.8 1065.6 67.2 532.8 33.6
Standard 2 308.4 19.5 1233.6 77.8 616.8 38.9
Standard 2 327.6 20.7 1310.4 82.7 655.2 41.3
Standard 2 349.2 22.0 1396.8 88.1 698.4 44.1
Standard 2 379.2 23.9 1516.8 95.7 758.4 47.8Mid
Number of
Passes
(See Note 4)
Minimum Flow Rate Maximum Flow Rate Nominal Flow Rate
(gpm) (L/s) (gpm) (L/s) (gpm) (L/s)
NOTES:
1. The 30XV units will start and pull down with loop temperatures up to 95 F (35 C).
2. Nominal flow rates required at AHRI (Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute) conditions: 44 F (7 C) leaving fluid temperature, 54 F (12 C) entering water temperature, 95 F (35 C) ambient. Fouling factor 0.00010 ft m2-K/kW).
3. To obtain proper temperature control, evaporator loop fluid vol­ume must be at least 3 gal/ton (3.23 L/kW) of chiller nominal capacity for air conditioning and at least 6 gal/ton (6.5 L/kW) for process applications or systems that must operate in low ambi­ent temperatures (below 32 F [0° C]).
4. For One Pass evaporators, apply a multiplier of 2 to the above flow rates.
2
-hr-F/Btu (0.000018
45
Page 46
Unit Sizes 30XV140, 160, 180, 200, 225
Fig. 38 — Evaporator Pressure Drop Curves, Standard Pass Flooded Evaporator (30XV140-225)
0
50
100
150
200
250
0.00 10.00 20.00 30.00 40.00 50.00 60.00 70.00 80.00
Pressure drop, kPa
Evaporator Flow Rate, l/s
140 Std Tier
140 Mid, High, & 160 Std Tier
160 Mid, High, & 180 Std Tier
180 Mid, High, & 200 Std Tier
200 Mid, & High Tier
225 Std Tier
225 Mid, & High Tier
Unit Sizes 30XV250, 275, 300, 325
Fig. 39 — Evaporator Pressure Drop Curves, Standard Pass Flooded Evaporator (30XV250-325)
0
50
100
150
200
250
0.00 20.00 40.00 60.00 80.00 100.00 120.00
Pressure drop, kPa
Evaporator Flow Rate, l/s
250 Std Tier
250 Mid, High, & 275 Std Tier
275 Mid, High, & 300 Std Tier
300 Mid, High, & 325 Std Tier
325 Mid, & High Tier
46
Page 47

OPERATION

BASE PLATE
VALVE MOTOR
VALVE MOTOR COVER
Fig. 40 — Typical ABV Assembly with Enclosure
a30-4236
Fig. 41 — Fully Open Ball Valve
with Actuator Removed
a30-4237
Fig. 42 — Ball Valve Motor
a30-4238
Sequence of Operation —
chiller, the evaporator pump will start. After verifying water flow, the control will monitor the entering and leaving water temperature. If the need for mechanical cooling is determined, the control decides which circuit and compressor to start. The control will start the required compressor completely unloaded and de-energize the oil separator heater (if already energized). The control will continue to load this circuit by increasing the VFD frequency to satisfy cooling requirements. Once fully loaded, the control will start the second circuit to satisfy load as required. Shutdown of each circuit under normal conditions oc­curs in the opposite sequence to loading. Once a circuit is fully unloaded the compressor is shut off and the EXV will close completely.
ACTUATED BALL VALVE (ABV) — For chillers equipped with this option (standard in most regions), either one or two discharge ABVs are located in the discharge line of each circuit of the unit. See Fig. 40 for a typical ABV assembly with enclosure. The ABV is a motorized ball valve, which is used to close the discharge line to prevent refrigerant migrating from condenser to the evaporator when the circuit is off. The valve will be opened before the compressor is started and will nor­mally close when pressure equalizes between suction and dis­charge lines.
The actuated ball valves are linked to the evaporator heater operation in the controls. Evaporator Heater option (Main Menu
Configuration Menu Factory Parameters Evapo-
rator Heater Installed = yes) must be enabled for the actuated ball valve to operate.
See Fig. 41 for a view of a fully open ball valve with the ac­tuator removed. The flat surface at the top of the valve shaft is parallel to the discharge line. The ball valve motor mounting plate should be perpendicular to the discharge line at all times. If not, adjust it by loosening the set screw on the side of the valve, reposition assembly and tighten set screw.
See Fig. 42 for a view of the ball valve motor mounting with a fully open valve. The motor actuator arm should be at a counterclockwise position, with the valve shaft in a parallel po­sition. If not in a parallel position, loosen the clamping screw and push the disengagement button to rotate the actuator arm until it stops. Retighten the clamping screw.
ABV Manual Operation ally as a discharge service valve by completing the following steps:
1. Remove the actuator cover.
2. With the compressor off hold down the Disengagement (Push) button. See Fig. 42.
3. Close the ABV by turning the shaft adapter by hand or with a wrench so that the flats on the end of the shaft are perpendicular to the discharge line.
4. Release the Push button.
5. Disconnect the control power cable to the ABV.
— The ABV can be operated manu-
With a command to start the
Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation — With a
command to start the chiller, the master chiller determines which chiller will become the lead chiller based on the con­figuration of Lead Lag Select (lead_sel) and Lead/Lag Bal­ance Delta (ll_bal_d). The lead chiller is always started first and the lag chiller is held at zero percent capacity by the master chiller forcing the lag demand limit value to 0%. If Lead Pulldown Time (lead_pul) has been configured, the lead chiller will continue to operate alone for that specified time. After the Lead Pulldown Time timer has elapsed and when the lead chiller is fully loaded, either all available compression is on or at the master demand limit value, then the lag start timer (lstr_tim) is initiated.
47
VALVE SHAFT
ACTUATOR ARM
MOUNTING - FULLY CLOSED
CLAMPING SCREW
MOUNTING - FULLY OPEN
DISENGAGEMENT BUTTON
Page 48
When the pulldown time and lag start time have elapsed and the Combined Leaving Chilled Water Temperature is more than 3° F (1.7° C) above the set point, then the lag chiller is started. If the lag chiller’s water pump was not started when the machines went into occupied mode, the lag chiller water pump will be started. The lag chiller will start with the master chiller forcing the lag chiller demand limit value (LAG_LIM) to the master’s demand limit value. If lead/lag capacity balance is selected, once the lag chiller has started, the master will try to keep the difference in capacity between lead and lag less than 20%. The master will then be responsible for water loop capacity calculation, and will de­termine which chiller, the lead or lag, will increase or de­crease capacity. When the load reduces, the lag chiller will be the first chiller to unload. To accomplish this, the lead chiller set point is decreased by 4° F (–2.2° C) until the lag chiller unloads.
PUMP OPERATION — For parallel chiller pump operation, the lead chiller’s water pump will be started. The lag chiller’s water pump will be maintained off if Lag Unit Pump Control = 0 (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Lag Unit Pump Control). The internal algorithm of the lead chiller will control capacity of the lead chiller.
Operating Modes — Operating modes are override
modes that affect normal operation of the equipment. More than one operating mode can be in effect at the same time. Some operating modes have corresponding capacity control overrides (see the Capacity Control Overrides section on page 41).
For the Touch Pilot™ display, the status of the operating modes can be found by accessing the Modes Menu (Main Menu Modes). Each operating mode and its status (Yes = active, No = inactive) is listed.
See Table 31 for a list of operating modes.
Table 31 — 30XV with Greenspeed

Operating Modes

OPERATING
MODE NUMBER

1 Startup Delay in Effect Yes/No 2 Second Setpoint in Use Yes/No 3 Reset in Effect Yes/No 4 Demand Limit Active Yes/No 5 Evaporator Pump Rotation Yes/No 6 Pump Periodic Start Yes/No 8 Master Slave Active Yes/No

12 Ice Mode in Effect Yes/No

DESCRIPTION STATUS
STARTUP DELAY IN EFFECT — This mode is checked for when the unit is started. This mode is active when the Min­utes Off Time (Main Menu Configuration Menu General Configuration Unit Off to On Delay) timer is active. The unit will not start until the timer has expired. The mode will ter­minate when the timer expires.
SECOND SETPOINT IN USE — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. The mode is active when Cooling Setpoint 2 (Main Menu Setpoint Table Cooling Setpoint 2) or Cool­ing Ice Setpoint (Main Menu Setpoint Table Cooling Ice Setpoint) is in use. While in this mode, the Current Setpoint (Main Menu General Parameters Current Setpoint) will show the Cooling Setpoint 2 or Cooling Ice Setpoint value.
While in this mode the unit will operate to the Cooling Set­point 2 or Cooling Ice Setpoint. The mode will terminate when the second setpoint is no longer in use.
RESET IN EFFECT — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. The mode will be active when Cooling Reset Se­lect (Main Menu Configuration Menu Reset Configu­ration Cooling Reset Select ) is enabled by setting the
®
Intelligence
value to 1 = Outside Air Temperature, 2 = Fluid Delta T, 3 = 4-20 mA Input, 4 = Space Temperature) and reset is active.
While in this mode, the Current Setpoint (Main Menu General Parameters Current Setpoint) will be modified ac­cording to the programmed information and will be displayed as the Control Point (Main Menu General Parameters Control Point). The mode will terminate when the Temperature Reset is not modifying the active leaving water set point, caus­ing the Current Setpoint to equal the Control Point.
DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. The mode is active when Demand Limit Type Select (Main Menu Configuration Menu General Configuration Demand Limit Type Select) is enabled either by setting the value to 1 = Switch Control or 2 = 4-20mA Con­trol, or setting the Night Capacity Limit (Main Menu Con­figuration Menu General Configuration Night Capacity Limit). The Active Demand Limit Value (Main Menu Gen­eral Parameters Active Demand Limit Value) will display the current demand limit according to the programmed infor­mation and the unit’s capacity will be reduced to the amount shown or lower. The mode will terminate when the Demand Limit command has been removed.
EVAPORATOR PUMP ROTATION — This mode is al­ways checked. The mode is active when the Evaporator Pump Sequence (Main Menu Configuration Menu Pump Configuration Evaporator Pumps Sequence) value is set to 2 = Two Pumps Automatic Changeover, and the Pump Auto Rotation Delay (Main Menu Configuration Menu Pump Configuration Pump Auto Rotation De­lay) has expired. The control will switch the operation of the pumps. The lead pump will operate normally. The lag pump will be started, becoming the lead, and then the original lead pump will be shut down. This mode will terminate when the pump operation has been completed.
PUMP PERIODIC START — This mode is active when the evaporator pump is started due to the periodic pump start config­uration (Main Menu Configuration Menu Pump Configu­ration Pump Sticking Protection = YES). If the pump has not run that day, a pump will be started and will run for 2 seconds at 2:00 PM. If the machine is configured for dual pumps, Pump 1 will run on even days (such as the day 2, 4, 6 of the month). Pump 2 will run on odd days (such as day 1,3, 5 of the month). The mode will terminate when the pump shuts down.
MASTER SLAVE ACTIVE — This mode is checked for if the machine is ON. This mode is active if Master Slave Control has been enabled. This occurs when two machines are pro­grammed, one as the master (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Master/Slave select = 1) and the other as a slave (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave config Master/Slave select = 2). Both the mas­ter and slave machines will respond to the capacity control commands issued by the master controller. This may include control point changes and demand limit commands. This mode will terminate when Master Slave Control has been disabled (Main Menu Configuration Menu Master Slave Config Master/Slave Select=0).
ICE MODE IN EFFECT — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. This mode is active when the Cooling Ice Set­point (Main Menu Setpoint Table Cooling Ice Setpoint) is in use. While in this mode, the Current Setpoint (Main Menu General Parameters Current Setpoint) will show the Cooling Ice Setpoint value and the unit will operate to that value. This mode will terminate when the Ice Cooling Ice Set­point is no longer in use (ICE DONE switch is closed).
Sensors — The electronic control uses up to 15 thermistors
to sense temperatures and up to 10 transducers to sense pres­sure for controlling chiller operation. These sensors are out­lined below.
48
Page 49
THERMISTORS (Tables 32-34) — Thermistors that monitor the chiller’s operation include: evaporator entering water, evaporator leaving water, dual chiller leaving water, com­pressor suction gas temperature, compressor discharge gas temperature, economizer temperature, liquid line tempera­ture, compressor motor temperature, and outdoor air tem­perature thermistors. These thermistors are 5,000 ohms at 77 F (25 C) and are identical in temperature versus resis­tance. The space temperature thermistor is 10,000 ohmsat 77 F (25 C) and has a different temperature vs. resistance. See Fig. 43 for thermistor locations.
Evaporator Leaving Water Sensor
— On all sizes, this therm­istor is installed in a friction fit well in the leaving water nozzle of the evaporator. See Fig. 44.
Evaporator Entering Water Sensor
— On all sizes, this thermistor is factory-installed in a friction fit well in the enter­ing water nozzle of the evaporator.
Suction Gas Temperature
— On all sizes, this thermistor is factory-installed in a friction fit well located on the compressor of each circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.
Compressor Discharge Gas Temperature
— On all sizes, this thermistor is factory-installed in a friction fit well located in the discharge end of the compressor for the circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.
Liquid Line Temperature
— This thermistor is factory-in­stalled in a friction fit well located in the liquid line of the cir­cuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.
Economizer Temperature
— On all sizes, this thermistor is factory-installed in a friction fit well located in the economizer line for the circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.
Compressor Motor Temperature
— On all sizes, this therm­istor is embedded in the motor windings. There are two therm­istors in each compressor. One spare is provided.
Outdoor Air Temperature
— This sensor is factory-installed
to the back of the control box. Remote Space Temperature
— This sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a field-installed accessory mounted in the indoor space and is used for water temperature reset. The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted thermo­stat would be (in the conditioned space where it will not
Table 32 — Thermistor Identification
be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or di­rect exposure to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).
Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to ter­minals in the unit main control box. See Fig. 45. The space temperature sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female connector. The RJ11 connector is used as access into the Carrier Comfort Network
®
(CCN) at the sensor.
To connect the space temperature sensor (see Fig. 45):
1. Using a 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) twisted pair conductor cable rated for the application, connect one wire of the twisted pair to one SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN terminal located under the cover of the space temperature sensor.
2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 7 and 8 on TB6 located in the unit control box.
Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11 connector into the CCN:
1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)
2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the space temperature sensor terminal block.
3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of the space temperature sensor.
4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the space temperature sensor.
5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to the remainder of the CCN communication bus.
NOTE: The energy management module (EMM) is required for this accessory.
TRANSDUCERS — There are 5 pressure transducers per cir­cuit, and two different types of transducers: low pressure (green connector) and high pressure (black connector).
Low Pressure Type: suction pressure transducer (SPT), econo­mizer pressure transducer (EPT).
High Pressure Type: discharge pressure transducer (DPT), oil pressure transducer (OPT), liquid line pressure transducer (LPT). See Fig. 46 for transducer locations.
THERMISTOR ID DESCRIPTION RESISTANCE AT 77 F (25 C) CONNECTION POINT
EWT Entering Water Thermistor 5k SIOBA-J25-AI01 LWT Leaving Water Thermistor 5k SIOBA-J25-AI02
OAT Outdoor Air Thermistor 5k SIOBA-J25-AI03 SGTA Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor 5k AUXA-J6-CH12 SGTB Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor 5k AUXB-J6-CH12 DGTA Circuit A Discharge Gas Thermistor 5k AUXA-J6-CH11 DGTB Circuit B Discharge Gas Thermistor 5k AUXB-J6-CH11
LIQT_A Circuit A Liquid Line Thermistor 5k AUXA-J7-CH13 LIQT_B Circuit B Liquid Line Thermistor 5k AUXB-J7-CH13
ECTA Circuit A Economizer Thermistor 5k SIOBA-J25-AI05
ECTB Circuit B Economizer Thermistor 5k SIOBB-J25-AI05 DUAL Dual Chiller LWT Thermistor 5k SIOBB-J25-AI03 CAMT Circuit A Motor Temperature 5k SIOBA-J25-AI04 CBMT Circuit B Motor Temperature 5k SIOBB-J25-AI04
SPT Space Temperature Thermistor 10k EMM-J6-CH2
49
Page 50
Table 33 — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs Resistance
TEMP
(F)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
–25 98,010 –24 94,707 –23 91,522 –22 88,449 –21 85,486 –20 82,627 –19 79,871 –18 77,212 –17 74,648 –16 72,175 –15 69,790 –14 67,490 –13 65,272 –12 63,133 –11 61,070 –10 59,081
–9 57,162 –8 55,311 –7 53,526 –6 51,804 –5 50,143 –4 48,541 –3 46,996 –2 45,505 –1 44,066
0 42,679 1 41,339 2 40,047 3 38,800 4 37,596 5 36,435 6 35,313 7 34,231 8 33,185
9 32,176 10 31,202 11 30,260 12 29,351 13 28,473 14 27,624 15 26,804 16 26,011 17 25,245 18 24,505 19 23,789 20 23,096 21 22,427 22 21,779 23 21,153 24 20,547 25 19,960
TEMP
(F)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
77 4,976 78 4,855 79 4,737 80 4,622 81 4,511 82 4,403 83 4,298 84 4,196 85 4,096 86 4,000 87 3,906 88 3,814 89 3,726 90 3,640 91 3,556 92 3,474 93 3,395 94 3,318 95 3,243 96 3,170 97 3,099 98 3,031
99 2,964 100 2,898 101 2,835 102 2,773 103 2,713 104 2,655 105 2,597 106 2,542 107 2,488 108 2,436 109 2,385 110 2,335 111 2,286 112 2,239 113 2,192 114 2,147 115 2,103 116 2,060 117 2,018 118 1,977 119 1,937 120 1,898 121 1,860 122 1,822 123 1,786 124 1,750 125 1,715 126 1,680 127 1,647
TEMP
(F)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
179 570 180 561 181 551 182 542 183 533 184 524 185 516 186 508 187 501 188 494 189 487 190 480 191 473 192 467 193 461 194 456 195 450 196 445 197 439 198 434 199 429 200 424 201 419 202 415 203 410 204 405 205 401 206 396 207 391 208 386 209 382 210 377 211 372 212 367 213 361 214 356 215 350 216 344 217 338 218 332 219 325 220 318 221 311 222 304 223 297 224 289 225 282
TEMP
(F)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
26 19,393 27 18,843 28 18,311 29 17,796 30 17,297 31 16,814 32 16,346 33 15,892 34 15,453 35 15,027 36 14,614 37 14,214 38 13,826 39 13,449 40 13,084 41 12,730 42 12,387 43 12,053 44 11,730 45 11,416 46 11,112 47 10,816 48 10,529 49 10,250 50 9,979 51 9,717 52 9,461 53 9,213 54 8,973 55 8,739 56 8,511 57 8,291 58 8,076 59 7,686 60 7,665 61 7,468 62 7,277 63 7,091 64 6,911 65 6,735 66 6,564 67 6,399 68 6,238 69 6,081 70 5,929 71 5,781 72 5,637 73 5,497 74 5,361 75 5,229 76 5,101
TEMP
(F)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
128 1,614 129 1,582 130 1,550 131 1,519 132 1,489 133 1,459 134 1,430 135 1,401 136 1,373 137 1,345 138 1,318 139 1,291 140 1,265 141 1,240 142 1,214 143 1,190 144 1,165 145 1,141 146 1,118 147 1,095 148 1,072 149 1,050 150 1,029 151 1,007 152 986 153 965 154 945 155 925 156 906 157 887 158 868 159 850 160 832 161 815 162 798 163 782 164 765 165 750 166 734 167 719 168 705 169 690 170 677 171 663 172 650 173 638 174 626 175 614 176 602 177 591 178 581
TEMP
(C)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
–32 100,260 –31 94,165 –30 88,480 –29 83,170 –28 78,125 –27 73,580 –26 69,250 –25 65,205 –24 61,420 –23 57,875 –22 54,555 –21 51,450 –20 48,536 –19 45,807 –18 43,247 –17 40,845 –16 38,592 –15 38,476 –14 34,489 –13 32,621 –12 30,866 –11 29,216 –10 27,633
–9 26,202 –8 24,827 –7 23,532 –6 22,313 –5 21,163 –4 20,079 –3 19,058 –2 18,094 –1 17,184
0 16,325 1 15,515 2 14,749 3 14,026 4 13,342 5 12,696 6 12,085 7 11,506 8 10,959
9 10,441 10 9,949 11 9,485 12 9,044 13 8,627 14 8,231
TEMP
(C)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
15 7,855 16 7,499 17 7,161 18 6,840 19 6,536 20 6,246 21 5,971 22 5,710 23 5,461 24 5,225 25 5,000 26 4,786 27 4,583 28 4,389 29 4,204 30 4,028 31 3,861 32 3,701 33 3,549 34 3,404 35 3,266 36 3,134 37 3,008 38 2,888 39 2,773 40 2,663 41 2,559 42 2,459 43 2,363 44 2,272 45 2,184 46 2,101 47 2,021 48 1,944 49 1,871 50 1,801 51 1,734 52 1,670 53 1,609 54 1,550 55 1,493 56 1,439 57 1,387 58 1,337 59 1,290 60 1,244 61 1,200
TEMP
(C)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
62 1,158 63 1,118 64 1,079 65 1,041 66 1,006 67 971 68 938 69 906 70 876 71 836 72 805 73 775 74 747 75 719 76 693 77 669 78 645 79 623 80 602 81 583 82 564 83 547 84 531 85 516 86 502 87 489 88 477 89 466 90 456 91 446 92 436 93 427 94 419 95 410 96 402 97 393 98 385
99 376 100 367 101 357 102 346 103 335 104 324 105 312 106 299 107 285
Table 34 — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs Resistance/Voltage
50
Page 51
Fig. 43 — Thermistor Locations
OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE (OAT)
SUCTION GAS TEMPERATURE (SGTA)
COMPRESSOR A TEMPERATURE
ECONOMIZER TEMPERATURE (ECTA)
DISCHARGE GAS TEMPERATURE (DGTA)
LIQUID TEMP (LIQT A)
SUCTION GAS TEMPERATURE (SGTB)
DISCHARGE GAS TEMPERATURE (DGTB)
ECONOMIZER TEMPERATURE (ECTB)
LIQUID TEMP (LIQT B)
COMPRESSOR B TEMPERATURE
LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE (LWT)
ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE (EWT)
5/8 in. HEX
6" MINIMUM
CLEARANCE FOR
THERMISTOR
REMOVAL
1.188 in.
2.315 in.
1/4-18 NPT
Fig. 44 — Dual Chiller Accessory Kit Leaving Water Thermistor and Well (Part No. 00EFN900044000A)
7
8
TB6
SEN
SEN
SENSOR
Fig. 45 — Typical Remote Space Temperature
Sensor (33ZCT55SPT) Wiring
WIRE TIE
INSERT THERMISTOR UNTIL
O-RING MEETS THE
THERMISTOR WELL BODY.
LOOP
THERMISTOR WIRE
AND SECURE
TO CHILLED WATER PIPE
51
Page 52
Economizer Assembly —
Fig. 46 — Transducer and Switch Locations
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (SPT A)
OIL SEPARATOR (A)
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (OPT A)
ECONOMIZER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (EPT A)
LIQUID LINE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (LPT A)
EVAPORATOR (B)
COMPRESSOR (B)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (DPT A)
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (SPT B)
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (OPT B)
ECONOMIZER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (EPT B)
LIQUID LINE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (LPT B)
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (DPT B)
OIL LEVEL SWITCH (OIL LS B)
EVAPORATOR (A)
COMPRESSOR (A)
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS B)
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS A)
EVAPORATOR FLOW SWITCH (CWFS)
OIL SEPARATOR (B)
OIL LEVEL SWITCH (OIL LSA)
POWERBOX END
an economizer assembly, which includes a brazed plate heat exchanger, electronic expansion valves (EXVs), and other components. See Fig. 47.
Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — See Fig. 48
for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refriger­ant enters the valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve operates through electronically controlled activation of a stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position unless pow­er pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on the phase relationship of the power pulses. The motor directly op­erates the spindle, which has rotating movements that are trans­formed into linear motion by the transmission in the cage as­sembly. The valve cone is a V-port type which includes a posi­tive shut-off when closed. The large number of steps and long stroke results in very accurate control of the refrigerant flow. The stepper motor has either 3810 (main) or 2625 (economiz­er) steps.
MAIN EXV CONTROL — The main EXV is controlled by the SIOB (J17-STPR1). Each circuit has thermistors lo­cated in the discharge line compressor (DGT), compressor motor cavity (SGT) and liquid line leaving the condenser (LIQT). Each circuit also has a discharge (DPT), suction (SPT), and liquid line pressure transducer (LPT). All the pressure readings as measured by the transducers are con­verted to saturated temperatures. The main control logic for the EXV uses liquid line subcooling, which is the difference between the liquid line saturation temperature and the liquid line temperature, to control the position of the EXV. The SIOB module controls the position of the electronic expan­sion valve stepper motor to maintain the subcooling set point. The EXV control logic has several overrides, which are also used to control the position of the EXV.
• Normal Mode (SUBCOOL)
• Low Discharge Superheat (DSH)
• Low Suction Pressure (SPMIN)
• Maximum Suction Pressure (SPMAX)

SERVICE

Each circuit on the unit has
52
• EXV Start (START) To view EXV overrides: Main Menu Maintenance Menu
EXV Control or EXVECO Control. Normal Mode (SUBCOOL)
— This is the normal mode of operation of the EXV. Based on the operating condition and loading of the compressor, the control calculates an optimal subcooling setting to maximize the system efficiency. The con­trols accordingly adjust the EXV opening to meet this calculat­ed subcooling setting. The range of the subcooling setting can be altered by using the Network Service Tool in the Configura­tion EXV_CFG table.
Low Discharge Superheat (DSH)
— The EXV control goes into the DSH mode when the DSH is below 16.2 F (9 C). The EXV closes down to increase the discharge superheat beyond
16.2 F (9 C) and returns to the SUBCOOL mode. Low Suction Pressure (SPMIN)
— The EXV control tries to open up the EXV to increase the suction pressure and come out of this mode. The SST setting to enter this mode is dependent on the fluid type. With water the EXV enters this mode if SST is less than 25 F (–3.9 C) in normal discharge superheat or less than 13 F (–10.6 C) in low DSH condition. It remains in this mode until SST is greater than 34 F (1.1 C) or greater than 25 F (–3.9 C) if subcool is greater than subcool setpoint.
Maximum Suction Pressure (SPMAX)
— The EXV enters this mode if the suction saturation temperature (SST) is greater than 55 F (13 C). The EXV closes down to regulate the SST at about 53.2 F (11.8 C). If the SST is less than 52.3 F (11.3 C) then the EXV returns to the normal mode of operation.
ECONOMIZER EXV CONTROL — The economizer EXV is controlled by the SIOB (J18-STPR2). An economizer gas temperature thermistor (ECT) and an economizer pressure transducer (EPT) are located in the line running from the econo­mizer assembly to the compressor. The economizer pressure is converted to saturated temperature and is used to calculate econ­omizer superheat. Economizer superheat equals economizer temperature minus saturated economizer temperature. The con­trol system controls the economizer EXV to maintain the econo­mizer superheat setpoint, which is approximately 18 F (–7.8 C). If the circuit capacity is less than 50%, the economizer EXV will be closed.
Page 53
Fig. 47 — Economizer Assembly
LIQUID LINE SHUT OFF VALVE
MAIN EXV
SIGHT GLASS
MAIN FLOW TO EVAPORATOR
ECONOMIZER EXV
FILTER DRIER
BRAZED PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER (ECONOMIZER)
ECONOMIZER RELIEF
ECONOMIZER FLOW TO COMPRESSOR
Fig. 48 — Cutaway Views of the Electronic Expansion Valve
1. Cable
2. Glass Seal
3. Motor Housing
4. Stepper Motor
5. Bearing
6. Lead Screw
7. Insert
8. Valve Piston
9. Valve Seat
10. Valve Port
a30-4241
EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE — There are two different economizer EXVs. Both of the economizer EXVs have a total of 2625 steps. There are three different main EXVs, which all have a total of 3810 steps. The EXV motor moves at 150 steps per second. Commanding the valve to ei­ther 0% or 100% will add an additional 160 steps to the move, to ensure the valve is open or closed completely.
Do not remove EXV cables from the SIOB board with the power applied to the board. Damage to the board may occur.
CAUTION
Follow the steps below to diagnose and correct EXV prob­lems. Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/ Off/Remote (EOR) Contact switch to the Off position.
Check the appropriate circuit EXV, EXV Position Circuit A % Open (Main Menu Quick Test Circuit A EXV Posi­tion) or EXV Position Circuit B % Open (Main Menu Maintenance Menu EXV Control). Use Quick Test proce­dure on page 116. The current value of 0 will be displayed. In­crease the EXV position to select 100% valve position. The ac­tuator should be felt moving through the EXV. To close the valve, select 0%. The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its stroke.
53
Page 54
If the valve is not working properly, continue with the fol-
lowing test procedure:
Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on SIOB-A (J17-STPR1) and SIOB-B (J17-STPR1). Refer to Ta­bles 6 and 7 for additional information.
Connect positive test lead to SIOB(X)-J17 terminal 12V for EXV(X) and SIOB(X)-J18 terminal 12V for economizer EXV(X). Using the Quick Test procedure on page 116, move the valve output under test to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads to­gether or pin 12V to any other pin, as board damage will occur. During the next several seconds, carefully connect the negative test lead to pins A,B,C and D in succession. Digital voltmeters will average this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If the output remains at a constant voltage other than 6 vdc or shows 0 volts, remove the connector to the valve and recheck.
Select 0% to close the valve. NOTE: Twelve vdc is the output from the SIOB board when
the valve is stationary.
If a problem still exists, replace the SIOB board. If the reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked. Check the EXV connector and intercon­necting wiring.
1. Check color-coding and wire connections. Make sure they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV board and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.
2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin terminals.
Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Remove the EXV module plug SIOB(X)-J17 for main EXV and SIOB(X)-J18 for economizer EXV. Check the resistance of the two windings between pins A and C for one winding and pins B and D for the other winding. The resistance should be 52 ohms (± 5.2 ohms). Also check pins A-D for any shorts to ground.
Inspecting/Opening Electronic Expansion Valves
IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gaskets before opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.
For units with isolation valve option: Close the ball valves on the liquid line directly above the filter drier, af­ter the main EXV before the evaporator, and on the econ­omizer line to the compressor. Remove any remaining re­frigerant from the economizer assembly using proper re­covery techniques. The economizer assembly has a
1
/4-in. access connection which can be used to remove charge from the inlet of the EXVs. Turn off the line voltage pow­er supply to the compressors.
CAUTION
Ensure refrigerant is removed from both the inlet and outlet of EXV assemblies. Equipment damage could result.
2. The expansion valve motor is hermetically sealed inside the top portion of the valve. See Fig. 48. Disconnect the EXV plug. Carefully unscrew the motor portion from the body of the valve. The EXV operator will come out with the motor portion of the device. Reconnect the EXV plug.
3. Enter the appropriate EXV test step under the Test mode (Main Menu Quick Test Table). Locate the desired pa­rameter for the Main EXVs: Circuit A EXV Position, Circuit B EXV Position or Economizer EXVs: EXV Eco Position Cir A, EXV Eco Position Cir B. Change the po­sition to 100%. Observe the operation of the lead screw. See Fig. 48. The motor should be turning, raising the op­erator closer to the motor. Motor actuator movement should be smooth and uniform from fully closed to fully open position. Select 0% and check open to closed opera­tion. If the valve is properly connected to the processor and receiving correct signals, yet does not operate as de­scribed above, the sealed motor portion of the valve should be replaced.
Installing EXV Motor
IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gasket before open­ing EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.
To check the physical operation of an EXV, the following steps should be performed. Charge not isolated within the unit must be recovered using proper refrigerant recovery techniques.
1. Isolate refrigerant within the chiller and recover re­maining charge. This will allow access to internal EXV components. Closing the valves will minimize the amount of refrigerant that will need to be removed.
For units without isolation valve option: Close the liquid line ball valve directly above the filter drier as well as the discharge line ball valves (see the Actuated Ball Valve section on page 47 for instructions). Remove any remain­ing refrigerant from the system low side using proper re­covery techniques. The evaporator liquid line inlet has an access port that can be used to remove charge from the evaporator. The economizer assembly has a
1
/4-in. access
connection which can be used to remove charge from the
If re-installing the motor, be sure to use a new gasket in the assembly. See Fig. 49. It is easier to install the motor assembly with the piston in the fully closed position. Insert the motor into the body of the EXV. Tighten the motor to the body to 36 ft-lb (50 N-m) and then tighten the valve another 30 degrees.
Moisture Liquid Indicator — Clear flow of liquid refrigerant indicates sufficient charge in system. Bubbles in the sight glass indicate undercharged system or presence of noncondensables. Moisture in system, measured in parts per million (ppm), changes color of indicator. See Table 35. Change filter drier at first sign of moisture in system.
IMPORTANT: Unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before moisture indicator can give an accurate reading.
With unit running, indicating element must be in con­tact with liquid refrigerant to give true reading.
inlet of the EXVs. Turn off the line voltage power supply to the compressors.
Table 35 — Color Indicators when Moisture is Present in Refrigerant
COLOR INDICATOR R-134a, 75 F (24 C) (ppm) R-134a, 125 F (52 C) (ppm) Green — Dry < 30 < 45 Yellow-green — Caution 30-100 45-170 Yellow — Wet >100 >170
54
Page 55
Filter Drier — Whenever moisture-liquid indicator shows
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
GASKET
OPEN VALVE IN QUICK TEST SUB-MODE BEFORE DISASSEMBLING
EF05BD271 NV 32.5mm EF05BD331 NV 36mm
50Nm (36 ft-lb)+ 30°
27mm / 1
1
/16''
27mm / 1
1
/16''
ADAPTER
NOTES:
1. Push down on valve piston to close valve before assembling.
2. After valve is assembled close valve in Quick Test sub-mode or cycle power before opening service valve.
Fig. 49 — Disassembly and Assembly of EXV Motor
a30-4072
DISASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
presence of moisture, replace filter drier(s). There is one filter drier assembly on each circuit with two cores. Refer to the Car­rier Standard Service Techniques Manual, Chapter 1, Refriger­ants, for details on servicing filter driers.
Liquid Line Service Valve — This valve is located immediately ahead of filter drier, and has a charging. In combination with compressor discharge service valve, each circuit can be pumped down into the high side for servicing with plate fin coils. Microchannel coils (MCHX) have much smaller volume and cannot accommodate the entire circuit charge.
Compressor Assembly — The 30XV units utilize
Greenspeed intelligence for efficient operation. The compres­sor is controlled by a VFD. See Fig. 50 for a view of a typical 06Z compressor. For optimal efficiency the compressor uses a variable inlet (VI) valve to change the inlet area of the lobes at different loading points. The valve is opened or closed by a solenoid on the compressor. The control logic looks at calcu­lated parameters to determine the switch point of the valve.
VI VALVE TROUBLESHOOTING — Use the quick test
1
/4-in. access connection for field
used for refrigerant system piping will have a yellow mark on one side of the gasket lips.
2. Apply a thin coat of Victaulic lubricant or silicone lubri­cant to the gasket sealing lips and exterior.
Always use a compatible lubricant to prevent the gasket from pinching or tearing during installation. Failure to fol­low this instruction could result in joint leakage.
3. Position the gasket over the pipe end. Make sure the gas­ket does not overhang the pipe end.
4. Align and bring the two pipe ends together. Slide the gas­ket into position and center it between the grooves in each pipe end. Make sure no portion of the gasket extends into the groove in either pipe end.
5. Install the housings over the gasket. Make sure the hous­ings’ keys engage the grooves completely on both pipe ends.
table (Main Menu Quick Test Table Circuit X VI) to en­able the VI valve output. Enable the valve output and verify the coil solenoid is energized.

SUCTION VICTAULIC COUPLING INSTALLATION

1. The outside surface of the pipe, between the groove and the pipe end, must be smooth and free from inden-
Make sure the gasket does not become rolled or pinched while installing the housings. Failure to follow this instruc­tion could cause damage to the gasket, resulting in joint leakage.
tations, projections (including weld seams), and roll marks to ensure a leak-tight seal. All oil, grease, loose paint, and dirt must be removed. The Victaulic gasket
6. Install the bolts, and thread a nut finger-tight onto each bolt. For couplings supplied with stainless steel hardware,
55
CAUTION
CAUTION
Page 56
apply an anti-seize compound to the bolt threads. Make sure the oval neck of each bolt seats properly in the bolt hole.
7. Tighten the nuts evenly by alternating sides until metal­to-metal contact occurs at the bolt pads. Make sure the housings’ keys engage the grooves completely. It is im­portant to tighten the nuts evenly to prevent gasket pinching.
8. Visually inspect the bolt pads at each joint to ensure metal-to-metal contact is achieved.
COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM — Each compressor/circuit has its own oil system which includes an oil filter, oil solenoid, check valve, oil level switch, oil separator heater, oil pressure transducer, and an oil shut-off valve. A typical oil system is shown in Fig. 51. See Table 36 for required oil quantity per cir­cuit, initially included from the factory.
Table 36 — Unit Oil Quantities
30XV UNIT SIZE
140 - 200 4.0 [17.0] 4.0 [17.0]
250 - 325 6.0 [20.8] 6.0 [20.8]
Oil Charge
225 6.0 [20.8] 4.0 [17.0]
— When additional oil or a complete charge is
OIL CHARGE (gal, [liters])
Circuit A Circuit B
required it must meet the following specifications:
• Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emkarate RL220XL
• Oil Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inhibited polyolester-based
synthetic compressor lubricant for use with screw compressors.
• ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Do not reuse drained oil or any oil that has been exposed to the atmosphere.
Oil is available in the following quantities from your local Carrier representative:
QUANTITY TOTALINE PART NO. 1 Quart P903-2325 1 Gallon P903-2301 5 Gallon P903-2305
If unsure if there is low oil charge in the system, follow the steps below:
1. If the unit shuts off repeatedly from a low oil level alert, it may be an indication of inadequate oil charge: however, it could also indicate the oil is not being reclaimed from the low-side of the system.
2. Begin running the circuit at full load for 1
1
/2 hours.
NOTE: An adequate load must be available.
3. After running the unit for 1.5 hours at full load, stop the unit. Check the oil level in the oil separator sight glass. An oil level should be visible in the upper sight glass. If level is not visible, the unit is low on oil charge.
4. Add oil until the oil is at the center of the upper sight glass. Make sure not to add oil beyond this level as ex­cess oil will be carried out of the oil separator into the system and might lead to system instabilities at certain conditions.
5. The factory oil charging stations are programed to add precise amount of oil to the oil separator and if the oil lev­el while inspection shows higher than middle of the top sight glass then it could be due to refrigerant mixed in it. Do not remove any oil.
Add oil to the oil separator using the
1
/4-in. access fitting
on the side of the separator. NOTE: To facilitate the oil charging process, ensure that
the unit is not running when adding oil. The system is under pressure even when the unit is not running, so it is necessary to use a suitable pump to add oil to the sys­tem. Using a suitable pump, add the system. Continue adding oil in
1
/2 gal (1.9 L) of oil to
1
/2 gal (1.9 L) incre-
ments until the problem is resolved, up to a maximum of
1.5 gal (5.7 L).
Oil Filter Maintenance
— Each circuit has one oil filter bolted externally to the compressor. Oil line pressure drop is monitored by the control. Oil line pressure drop is calculat­ed by subtracting oil pressure (OPT) from discharge pres­sure (DPT). If the oil line pressure drop exceeds 30 psig (206.8 kPa) for 5 minutes the control will generate a High Oil Filter Pressure Drop alert. The High Oil Filter Pressure Drop alert will not shut down the compressor, but instead indicates that the oil filter is dirty. If oil pressure line losses exceed 50 psig (344.7 kPa) for more than 30 seconds then the control will shut down the circuit on Maximum Oil Fil­ter Differential Pressure Failure.
CAUTION
Compressor oil is pressurized. Use proper safety precau­tions when relieving pressure.
Replacing the Oil Filter
— Close the oil service valves on ei­ther side of filter by removing the cap and closing the valve. One is connected to the oil filter and the other is mounted on the compressor. Connect a charging hose to the ¼-in. access fit­ting port located between the filter and compressor. Bleed off the oil located in this section. A quart of oil is typically re­moved during this process. Unscrew the nuts on either side of the filter. Remove the filter and install the new one. Make sure to remove the plastic caps from the new filter before installa­tion. Take care not to lose or damage the new o-rings on the new filter. Draw a vacuum at the service port. Remove the charging hose and open the oil service valves. Replace caps on access port and service valves. Check both fittings for leaks.
Evaporator Service — The 30XV units use flooded
style evaporators. ISOLATION VALVE — The isolation valve is a factory-
installed option for 30XV units. The option includes a butterfly-style suction service valve on the suction lines, and manual ball valves on discharge, evaporator inlet and economizer lines. The butterfly valve is connected to the suction line by Victaulic connections. See Fig. 52 and 53 for details on the butterfly suction service valve opera­tion. The valve locks into place when fully opened or ful­ly closed.
56
Page 57
Fig. 50 — Typical 06Z Compressor (All Units)
MOTOR THERMISTOR TERMINALS
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER LOCATION
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH LOCATION
HIGH PRESSURE TRANSDUCER LOCATION
ECONOMIZER PORT
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TAP
SIDE VIEW
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER LOCATION
VI SOLENOID VALVE
OIL SOLENOID VALVE
COMPRESSOR TERMINALS
OIL INLET PORT
TOP VIEW
COMPRESSOR TERMINALS
DISCHARGE GAS THERMISTOR
SUCTION TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR LOCATION
57
Page 58
Fig. 51 — Typical Oil System (All Units)
OIL FILTER
OIL SERVICE VALVES
OIL SOLENOID
OIL SEPARATOR
Fig. 52 — Suction Service Valve
Butterfly Valve Closed
Fig. 53 — Suction Service Valve
Butterfly Valve Open
58
Page 59
EVAPORATOR FREEZE PROTECTION — All evapora-
Fig. 54 — Evaporator Heater Set Point Adjustment
LEGEND
1—Overcurrent Adjusting Potentiometer 2—Power Supply Status LED (green) 3—Relay Output Supply Status LED (yellow) 4—35 mm Rail Clip-in Spring
a30-5648
Fig. 55 — Elliott Tube Plug
a30-4083
tors are equipped with evaporator heaters (unless removed as an option for Middle Eastern regions). The control logic uses the unit status, outdoor air temperature, and the saturated suc­tion temperatures for all circuits to decide if the evaporator heater should be energized. The evaporator heaters can only be energized when the state of the unit is OFF. The evaporator heaters will be energized according to the following logic:
1. The Evaporator Heater Setpoint is the Brine Freeze Set­point + Evaporator Heater Delta Setpoint.
2. If the outside air temperature (OAT) is below the Evapo­rator Heater Setpoint or if the saturated suction tempera­ture (SST) of any one circuit is lower than the Evaporator Heater Setpoint + 6° F (3.3° C), the evaporator heater is activated, or if already activated, will remain on.
3. If the SST of all circuits is higher than the Evaporator Heater Setpoint + 10° F (5.5° C), and if OAT is higher than the Evaporator Heater Setpoint +2° F, the evaporator heater will be turned off, or if already off, will remain off.
4. If either condition 2 or condition 3 above is not met, the heater mode remains unchanged.
If the entering or leaving water temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Setpoint (Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters Brine Freeze Setpoint) +1.0° F (0.5° C), then the heater will be turned on along with the pump.
A current sensing relay monitors the current to the evap­orator heaters. If a heater fails, the reduction in current will switch the relay and produce a Evaporator Freezer Alarm (EVAPORATOR_FREEZE, 10001). In addition, the pump signal will energize. See Appendix G for relay set points. See Fig. 54 for evaporator heater current sensing relay set point adjustment location.
LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE — The Touch Pilot control is programmed to shut chiller down if leaving fluid tem­perature drops below 34 F (1.1 C) for evaporator fluid type water or below the Brine Freeze Setpoint (Main Menu Configuration Menu Service Parameters Line 5) for the evaporator fluid type brine. When fluid temperature rises to 6° F (3.3° C) above the leaving fluid set point, the alarm will reset and the chiller restarts. Reset is automatic as long as this is the first occurrence. For repeat occurrences within 24 hours the alarm must be manually reset.
LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION — All 30XV machines include an integral flow switch that protects the evaporator against loss of evaporator flow.
TUBE PLUGGING — A leaky tube can be plugged until retubing can be done. The number of tubes plugged determines how soon the evaporator must be retubed. All tubes in the evaporator may be removed. Loss of unit capacity and effi­ciency as well as increased pump power will result from plug­ging tubes. Failed tubes should be replaced as soon as possible. Up to 10% of the total number of tubes can be plugged before retubing is necessary. Figure 55 shows an Elliott tube plug and a cross-sectional view of a plug in place. See Tables 37 and 38 for plug components. If the tube failure occurs in both circuits using tube plugs will not correct the problem. Contact your local Carrier representative for assistance.
CAUTION
Use extreme care when installing plugs to prevent damage to the tube sheet section between the holes.
To configure this option with the Touch Pilot controls:
DISPLAY
NAME
Evaporator Heater Installed
NOTE: Evaporator Heater must be configured to YES for the actuated ball valves (ABV) to operate.
Main Menu Configuration Menu Factory Parameters
PATH VALUE
Evap Heater Installed YES/NO
IMPORTANT: If unit is installed in an area where ambient temperatures fall below 32 F (0° C), a suitable corrosion-inhibited antifreeze solution or evaporator heater must be used in the chilled water circuit.
Table 37 — Plug Component Parts
(Evaporator Units Only)
COMPONENT PART NUMBER
For Tubes
Brass Pin 853103-1*
Brass Ring
For Holes without tubes
Brass Pin 853103-1A
Brass Ring 85102-738 Loctite No. 675 † Locquic “N”† Roller Extension S82-112/11
*Order directly from Elliot Tool Technologies, Dayton, OH or RCD.
†Can be obtained locally.
853002-640 or 657*
(measure tube ID
before ordering)
Table 38 — Evaporator Tube Components
COMPONENT
Tube sheet hole diameter 0.756 19.20 Tube OD 0.750 19.05 Tube ID after rolling (includes
expansion due to clearance.)
NOTE: Tubes replaced along heat exchanger head partitions must be flush with tube sheet (both ends).
0.650 to
0.667
SIZE
in. mm
16.51 to 16.94
59
Page 60
EVAPORATOR RETUBING — When retubing is required,
9
5
2
4
7
11
12
8
1
3
6
10
13
14
15
16
SINGLE PASS ONLY
Fig. 56 — Flooded Evaporator Unit Head
Recommended Bolt Torque Sequence
a30-4246
24 VAC
N
L1
BRN WHT BLK
BLU
1
2
3
4
Fig. 57 — Chilled Water Flow Switch
OUT
IN
FLOW SWITCH (NOT TO SCALE)
a30-5854
Fig. 58 — Flow Switch Location
obtain the service of qualified personnel experienced in boiler maintenance and repair. Most standard procedures can be fol­lowed when retubing the evaporators. An 8% crush is recom­mended when rolling replacement tubes into the tube sheet. Place one drop of Loctite No. 675 or equivalent on top of tube prior to rolling. This material is intended to “wick” into the area of the tube that is not rolled into the tube sheet, and pre­vent fluid from accumulating between the tube and the tube sheet. New tubes must also be rolled into the center tube sheet to prevent circuit to circuit leaks.
TIGHTENING EVAPORATOR HEAD BOLTS Preparation
— When reassembling evaporator heads, always check the condition of the O-rings first. The O-ring should be replaced if there are visible signs of deterioration, cuts or damage. Apply a thin film of grease to the O-ring before installation. This will aid in holding the O-ring in the groove while the head is installed. Torque all bolts to the following specification and in sequence:
3
/4-in. Diameter Perimeter Bolts (Grade 5). . . . 200 to 225 ft-lb
(271 to 305 N-m)
1. Install all bolts finger tight.
2. Bolt tightening sequence is outlined in Fig. 56. Follow the numbering or lettering sequence so that pressure is evenly applied to O-ring.
3. Apply torque in one-third steps until required torque is reached. Load all bolts to each one-third step before pro­ceeding to next one-third step.
4. No less than one hour later, retighten all bolts to required torque values.
5. After refrigerant is restored to system, check for refriger­ant leaks using recommended industry practices.
6. Replace evaporator insulation.
CAUTION
Hard scale may require chemical treatment for its preven­tion or removal. Consult a water treatment specialist for proper treatment procedures.
EVAPORATOR CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH — A thermal-dispersion flow switch is factory-installed in the en­tering water nozzle for all machines. See Fig. 57 and 58. Figure 58 shows typical installation. If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the steps below to correct:
1. Check to confirm that all strainers are clean, valves are open and pumps are running. For the case of variable frequency drive (VFD) controlled pumps, ensure the minimum speed setting has not been changed.
2. Measure the pressure drop across the evaporator. Use the evaporator pressure drop curves on page 46 to calculate the flow and compare this to system requirements. The pressure drop curves are for water only.
INSPECTING/CLEANING HEAT EXCHANGERS —
erating season. Because these tubes have internal ridges, a rota­ry-type tube cleaning system is necessary to fully clean the tubes. Tube condition in the evaporator will determine the scheduled frequency for cleaning, and will indicate whether water treatment is adequate in the chilled water/brine circuit.
Inspect and clean evaporator tubes at the end of the first op-
Inspect the entering and leaving water thermistor wells for signs of corrosion or scale. Replace the well if corroded or re­move any scale if found.

All Units

EVAPORATOR WATER TREATMENT — Untreated or improperly treated water may result in corrosion, scaling, erosion or algae. The services of a qualified water treatment specialist should be obtained to develop and monitor a treat­ment program.
60
Page 61
CAUTION
Water must be within design flow limits, clean and treated to ensure proper machine performance and reduce the potential of tubing damage due to corrosion, scaling, and algae. Carrier assumes no responsibility for evaporator damage resulting from untreated or improperly treated water.
PREPARATION FOR WINTER SHUTDOWN — If the unit is not operational during the winter months, at the end of the cooling season complete the following steps.
CAUTION
3. It is recommended that the loop be protected with a suitable corrosion-inhibited antifreeze solution such as propylene glycol. The concentration should be ade­quate to provide freeze protection to 15° F (8.3° C) be­low the expected low ambient temperature conditions. Evaporator heaters will not protect the evaporator from freeze-up in the event of power loss.
Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Con­denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Rec­ommendations —
essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimina­tion of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is
Failure to remove power before draining heater equipped evaporators can result in heater damage.
Evaporator to be drained for winter shutdown
1. To prepare the system for winter shutdown, draining the fluid from the system is highly recommended. Isolate the evaporator from the rest of the system with water shutoff valves. Be sure to deenergize heaters (if installed) by opening circuit breaker (CB-7) or shut off power to the chiller to prevent damage if the evaporator is drained.
2. Remove the evaporator drain plug. Follow all local codes and regulations regarding the fluid disposal.
3. Once fully drained, replace the drain plug(s) and com­pletely fill the evaporator, and hydronic package if equipped, with suitable corrosion-inhibited antifreeze solution such as propylene glycol. The concentration should be adequate to provide freeze protection to 15° F (8.3° C) below the expected low ambient temperature conditions. Antifreeze can be added through the vent on top of the evaporator head. Evaporator fluid volumes can be found in the Installation Instructions for the unit.
4. Leave the evaporator filled with the antifreeze solution for the winter to provide corrosion protection during the off season. The evaporator may be drained if de­sired. Follow all local codes and regulations regarding the fluid disposal.
5. At the beginning of the next cooling season, be sure that there is refrigerant pressure in each circuit before refilling evaporator, add recommended inhibitor, and reset the cir­cuit breaker for the heater (CB-7) if opened or restore power.
Evaporator to remain filled for winter shutdown
1. If the evaporator will not be drained, do not shut off pow­er disconnect during off-season shutdown.
2. If the chilled water loop is not protected with a suitable corrosion-inhibited antifreeze solution such as propylene glycol, the unit must have evaporator pump control. In the event of a power failure with sub-freezing tempera­tures, the unit will not have any evaporator freeze protec­tion and may be subject to damage.
CAUTION
Operation or winter shutdown with fresh water is not fail­safe should there be a loss of power to the chiller or to the circulating pump. Freeze damage due to power loss or dis­abling chiller pump control in fresh water systems will impair or otherwise negatively affect the warranty.
CAUTION
Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage the coil.
1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coil face or trapped within the mounting frame and brackets.
2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and gloves. Full coverage clothing is recommended.
3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens­er coils. Only clean potable water is authorized for clean­ing condenser coils.
4. Clean condenser face by spraying the coil steady and uni­formly from top to bottom while directing the spray straight toward the coil. Do not exceed 900 psig (6205 kPa), 104 F (40 C) water temperature, or 45 degree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. (304.8 mm) from the coil face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent damage to air centers.
CAUTION
Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between air centers and refrigerant tubes.
RTPF (Round Tube Plate Fin) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommenda­tions —
maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination of con­tamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly in­crease the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The following maintenance and cleaning procedures are recom­mended as part of the routine maintenance activities to ex­tend the life of the coil.
REMOVE SURFACE LOADED FIBERS — Surface load­ed fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be applied in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating of a protected coil) if the tool is applied across the fins.
NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil. This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse.
PERIODIC CLEAN WATER RINSE — A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are applied in coastal or industrial environments. However, it is very important that
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to
61
Page 62
the water rinse is made with very low velocity water stream to
WIRE GUARD
FAN BLADE
FAN DECK
FORMED METAL MOUNT
MOTOR
a30-5863
Fig. 59 — Fan Mounting
avoid damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning as described below is recommended.
ROUTINE CLEANING OF RTPF COIL SURFACE — Routine cleaning with Totaline
®
environmentally balanced coil cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. This cleaner is available from Carrier Replacement Parts division as part num­ber P902-0301 for a one gallon container, and part number P902-0305 for a five gallon container. It is recommended that all coils, including the standard copper tube aluminum fin, pre­coated fin, copper fin, or e-coated coils be cleaned with the Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner as described below. Coil cleaning should be part of the unit’s regularly scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment. Avoid the use of:
• coil brighteners
• acid cleaning prior to painting
• high pressure washers
• poor quality water for cleaning
Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner is non-flam­mable, hypoallergenic, nonbacterial, and a USDA accepted biodegradable agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding components such as electrical wiring, painted metal surfaces, or insulation. Use of non-recommended coil cleaners is strong­ly discouraged since coil and unit durability could be affected.
Totaline Environmentally
Balanced Coil Cleaner Applica-
tion Equipment
•21/2 gallon garden sprayer
• Water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle
CAUTION
Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic clean­ers should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube inter­face where dissimilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt below the surface of the coil, use the Totaline environ­mentally balanced coil cleaner as described above.
CAUTION
High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase airside pressure drop. Reduced unit performance or nuisance unit shutdown may occur.
Totaline Environmentally
Balanced Coil Cleaner Applica-
tion Instructions
1. Proper eye protection such as safety glasses is recom­mended during mixing and application.
2. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum cleaner as described above.
3. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins.
4. Mix Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner in
1
a 2
/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instruc­tions included with the cleaner. The optimum solution temperature is 100 F (37.8 C).
NOTE: Do NOT
USE water in excess of 130 F (54.4 C), as the
enzymatic activity will be destroyed.
5. Thoroughly apply Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned area, tube sheets and coil headers.
6. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and ap­ply cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion. Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize potential for fin damage.
7. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned areas.
8. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly cleaned.
9. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution for 10 minutes.
10. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing. Re­apply cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute saturation is achieved.
11. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean water using downward rinsing motion of water spray nozzle. Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle.
Condenser Fans — A formed metal mount bolted to
the coil caps supports each fan and motor assembly. A shroud and a wire grille provide protection from the rotating fan. See Fig. 59. To remove the fan a special puller (RCD part no. 30RB680082) can be used. The fan utilizes a set screw and does not require the use of retaining compound in the key­way. The fan can be removed without the puller, but its use eases disassembly. The exposed end of the fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If fan motor must be re­moved for service or replacement, re-grease the fan shaft. The fan needs to be positioned fully down against the step on the motor shaft. Apply blue thread locker (Loctite 243) to the threads of both the axial bolt and the set screw. Install the thick washer and M8 axial bolt; do not fully tighten. Install set screw and tighten to 16 ± 2 ft-lbs (21.7 ± 2.7 Nm). Torque the axial bolt to 24 ± 2 ft-lbs (32.5 ± 2.7 Nm). Reinstall shroud and wire grille.
62
Page 63

Refrigerant Circuit

LEAK TESTING — Units are shipped with complete oper­ating charge of refrigerant R-134a (see Physical Data tables supplied in the 30XV installation instructions) and should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test. If there is no pressure in the system, introduce enough nitrogen to search for the leak. Repair the leak using good refrigeration practices. After leaks are repaired, system must be evacuat­ed and dehydrated.
REFRIGERANT CHARGE — Refer to Physical Data tables supplied in the 30XV installation instructions. Immediately ahead of filter drier in each circuit is a factory-installed liquid line service valve. Each valve has a
1
/4-in. access connection
for charging liquid refrigerant. Charging with Unit Off and Evacuated
— Close liquid line service valve before charging. Weigh in charge shown on unit nameplate. Open liquid line service valve; start unit and allow it to run several minutes fully loaded. Check for a clear sight glass. Be sure clear condition is liquid and not vapor.
Charging with Unit Running
— If charge is to be added while unit is operating, all condenser fans and compressors must be operating. It may be necessary to block condenser coils at low ambient temperatures to raise condensing pressure to approxi­mately 198 psig (1365 kPa) to turn all condenser fans on. Do not totally block a coil to do this. Partially block all coils in uniform pattern. Charge each circuit until sight glass shows clear liquid, and has a liquid line temperature of 103 F (39 C).
Add 3 to 5 lb (1.36 to 2.27 kg), depending on unit size and­coil type, of liquid charge into the fitting located on the tube en­tering the evaporator. This fitting is located between the elec­tronic expansion valve (EXV) and the evaporator.
Allow the system to stabilize and then recheck the liquid temperature. If needed, add additional liquid charge, 3 to 5 lb at a time, allowing the system to stabilize between each charge addition. Slowly add charge as the sight glass begins to clear to avoid overcharging.
IMPORTANT: When adjusting refrigerant charge, circu­late fluid through evaporator continuously to prevent freezing and possible damage to the evaporator. Do not overcharge, and never charge liquid into the low-pressure side of system.
Safety Devices — The 30XV chillers contain many
safety devices and protection logic built into the electronic control. Following is a description of the major safeties.
COMPRESSOR PROTECTION Motor Overload
logic protect each compressor against overcurrent.
All compressors have factory-installed high-pressure switches. See Table 39. Each high-pressure switch is connected directly to its associated VFD (terminals 12 and 37). If the switch opens during operation, the compressor will be shut down. Manual reset of the high pressure switch, VFD, and the control is required to restart the compressor.
Table 39 — High-Pressure Switch Settings
UNIT 30XV 323.5 + 0.0 –14.0 2230 + 0.0 –14.0
OIL SEPARATOR HEATERS — Each oil separator circuit has a heater mounted on the side of the vessel. The heater is de-energized any time the compressor is on. If the compres­sor is off and outdoor-air temperature (OAT) is greater than 100 F (37.8 C) the heater is de-energized. The heater will also be de-energized if OAT – SST > 30 F (16.7 C) and the OAT –LWT > 30 F (16.7 C).
— The compressor VFD fuses and drive
SWITCH SETTING
psig kPa
Relief Devices — Fusible plugs are located in each cir-
cuit between the condenser and the liquid line shutoff valve. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES — Valves are installed in
each circuit and are located on the evaporators and oil sepa­rators. These valves are designed to relieve if an abnormal pressure condition arises. Relief valves on all evaporators relieve at 220 psig (1517 kPa). Relief valves on oil separa­tors relieve at 350 psig (2413 kPa). These valves should not be capped. If a valve relieves, it should be replaced. If the valve is not replaced, it may relieve at a lower pressure, or leak due to trapped dirt from the system which may prevent resealing. See Table 40. Some local building codes require that relieved gases be exhausted to a specific location. This connection allows conformance to this requirement.
Table 40 — Relief Valve Connection Specifications
LOCATION CONNECTION SIZES
Oil Separator 3/8 SAE Flare
Evaporator 3/4 in. NPT Female
Inspection and Maintenance chiller protect the system against the potentially dangerous effects of overpressure. To ensure against damage to the equipment and possible injury to personnel, these devices must be kept in peak operating condition. As a minimum, the following maintenance is required:
1. At least once a year, disconnect the vent piping at the valve outlet if equipped. Inspect the vent piping for corrosion, a restriction or blockage. If any is found, clean or replace the affected vent piping.
2. Carefully inspect the valve body and mechanism for any evidence of internal corrosion or rust, dirt, scale, leakage, etc. If corrosion or foreign material is found, do not at­tempt to repair or recondition; replace the valve.
3. If the chiller is installed in a corrosive atmosphere or the relief valves are vented into a corrosive atmo­sphere, inspect relief valves and piping at more fre­quent intervals.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) — The 30XV
units with Greenspeed frequency drives (VFDs) to control the compressors and con­denser fans. The Danfoss VLT* HVAC drives each include an LCD user interface display. However, all necessary functions and statuses can be accessed from within the Touch Pilot™ menus. The VFDs are configured through the Touch Pilot con­trols, and parameters should not be changed manually.
COMPRESSOR DRIVES — Each unit is equipped with two VFDs to control the compressor operation, one for each cir­cuit. The VFDs vary the operating speed of the compressors by changing the input power frequency over a programmed range. The compressor VFDs should not be operated below minimum programmed frequency, to ensure adequate oil re­turn on the unit. When looking at the end of the unit, the Ckt A drive is closer to the control panel. See Fig. 60 for com­pressor VFD locations.
For chillers 140-325 tons, the VFDs are equipped with an aluminum enclosure to protect the drive from outdoor conditions. The cover must be removed to access the LCD user interface display or to service the drive. The cover is secured with 6 screws. See Fig. 61 for details on how to re­move or reinstall the drive cover.
— The relief valves on this
®
intelligence are equipped with variable
63
Page 64
Fig. 60 — VFD Compressor Locations
CIRCUIT A
30XV140-200
30XV225-325
COMPRESSOR VFD
CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR VFD
CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR VFD
CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR VFD
64
Page 65
CAUTION
2 SCREWS SECURE COVER AT TOP
2 SCREWS SECURE COVER AT EACH SIDE
a30-5878
Fig. 61 — Compressor VFD Cover Attachment
If the compressor VFD enclosure is removed for service it MUST be reinstalled to protect the drive from water intru­sion. If the cover is not properly installed the VFD will not be covered under warranty.
CONDENSER FAN DRIVES — Chillers with M or H in the 10th position of the model number or with the Low Ambi­ent option will have condenser fans on each circuit which are controlled by one or two VFDs. The fans on each circuit all operate together at the same preprogrammed frequency. Ta­bles 41-43 show which condenser fans are controlled by each drive. See Tables 41-43 for typical fan VFD arrangement. See Fig. 62 for fan VFD location.
65
Page 66
Table 41 — Condenser Fan Drive Arrangement, Standard Tier
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM B5
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM B7
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM A8
FM B7
FM B8
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
CIRCUIT
FAN STAGE A12345678
A
CONTACTOR # FC A1 FC A2 FC A3 FC A4
FAN POSITION FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4
FAN STAGE B12345678
B
CONTACTOR # FC B1 FC B2 FC B3 FC B4
FAN POSITION FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4
FAN STAGE A12345678
A
CONTACTOR # FC A1 FC A2 FC A3 FC A4 FC A5
FAN POSITION FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5
FAN STAGE B12345678
B
CONTACTOR # FC B1 FC B2 FC B3 FC B4 FC B5
FAN POSITION FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5
FAN STAGE A12345678
A
CONTACTOR # FC A1 FC A2 FC A3 FC A4 FC A5 FC A6
FAN POSITION FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6
FAN STAGE B12345678
B
CONTACTOR # FC B1 FC B2 FC B3 FC B4
FAN POSITION FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4
FAN STAGE A12345678
A
CONTACTOR # FC A1 FC A2 FC A3 FC A4 FC A5 FC A6
FAN POSITION FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6
FAN STAGE B12345678
B
CONTACTOR # FC B1 FC B2 FC B3 FC B4 FC B5 FC B6
FAN POSITION FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6
FAN STAGE A12345678
A
CONTACTOR # FC A1 FC A2 FC A3 FC A4 FC A5 FC A6 FC A7
FAN POSITION FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7
FAN STAGE B12345678
B
CONTACTOR # FC B1 FC B2 FC B3 FC B4 FC B5 FC B6 FC B7
FAN POSITION FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7
FAN STAGE A12345678
A
CONTACTOR # FC A1 FC A2 FC A3 FC A4 FC A5 FC A6 FC A7 FC A8
FAN POSITION FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8
FAN STAGE B12345678
B
CONTACTOR # FC B1 FC B2 FC B3 FC B4 FC B5 FC B6 FC B7 FC B8
FAN POSITION FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7 FMB8
30XV140-180
30XV200
30XV225
30XV250-275
30XV300
30XV325
66
Page 67
Table 42 — Condenser Fan Drive Arrangement, Mid Tier
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM B5
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM B5
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
30XV 140 (All Voltages)
VFD Designation A1
A
Fan Position FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4
VFD Designation B1
B
Fan Position FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4
30XV 160,180 (208/230V)
VFD Designation A2 A1
A
Fan Position FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5
VFD Designation B2 B1
B
Fan Position FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5
30XV 160,180 (380-575V)
VFD Designation A1
A
Fan Position FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5
VFD Designation B1
B
Fan Position FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5
30XV200 (208/230V)
VFD Designation A2 A1
A
Fan Position FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM B7
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
VFD Designation B2 B1
B
Fan Position FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6
30XV200 (380-575V)
VFD Designation A1
A
Fan Position FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6
VFD Designation B1
B
Fan Position FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6
30XV225 (380V-575V)
VFD Designation A1
A
Fan Position FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7
VFD Designation B1
B
Fan Position FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5
30XV250,275 (380-575V)
VFD Designation A1
A
Fan Position FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7
VFD Designation B1
B
Fan Position FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7
67
Page 68
Control
FM B4
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM A8
FM B9
FM A9
FM B7
FM B8
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B2
FM B1
Box End
Table 42 — Condenser Fan Drive Arrangement, Mid Tier (cont)
30XV300 (380V-575V)
VFD
Designation
FM
A3
A1
FM
FM
A2
A4
FM
A5
A7
FM
FM
A6
A8
FM
FM
FM
FM B7
FM B8
FM
B5
FM B6
FM
B3
B1
FM
FM
B4
B2
A
B
A
B
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8 FMA9
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7 FMB8 FMB9
A2 A1
B2 B1
30XV325 (380-575V)
A2 A1
B2 B1
68
Page 69
Control
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM B7
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM A8
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
Table 43 — Condenser Fan Drive Arrangement, High Tier
30XV140 (208/230V)
FM A5
FM B5
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
VFD
Designation
A
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
B
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
A
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
B
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
A
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
B
Fan
Position
30XV160,180 (380-575V)
VFD
Designation
A
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
B
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
A
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
B
Fan
Position
30XV200 (380-575V)
VFD
Designation
A
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
B
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
A
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
B
Fan
Position
30XV160,180 (208/230V)
30XV200 (208/230V)
30XV225 (380-575V)
A2 A1
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5
B2 B1
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5
30XV140 (380-575V)
A1
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5
B1
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5
A2 A1
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6
B2 B1
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6
A1
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6
B1
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6
A2 A1
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7
B2 B1
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7
A2 A1
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8
B1
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6
A1
B1
69
Page 70
Table 43 — Condenser Fan Drive Arrangement, High Tier (cont)
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM A8
FM B7
FM B8
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B4
FM B1
FM B2
FM B4
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM A8
FM A9
FM B9
FM B7
FM B8
FM B5
FM B6
FM B3
FM B2
FM B1
FM B6
FM B8
Control Box End
FM A1
FM A2
FM A3
FM A4
FM A5
FM A6
FM A7
FM A8
FM A9
FM A10
FM B9
FM B10
FM B7
FM B5
FM B4
FM B3
FM B2
FM B1
Fan VFD A1
Fan VFD B2
Fan VFD B1 Fan VFD A2
Fig. 62 — Fan VFD Location
30XV250, 275 (380V-575V)
A
B
A
B
A
B
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
VFD
Designation
Fan
Position
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8 FMA9
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7 FMB8 FMB9
FMA1 FMA2 FMA3 FMA4 FMA5 FMA6 FMA7 FMA8 FMA9 FMA10
FMB1 FMB2 FMB3 FMB4 FMB5 FMB6 FMB7 FMB8 FMB9 FMB10
A2 A1
B2 B1
30XV300 (380-575V)
A2 A1
B2 B1
30XV325 (380-575V)
A2 A1
B2 B1
70
Page 71
VFD DISPLAY NAVIGATION
a
b
c
1
2
3
4
a30-5862
LEGEND
1—Graphical display with status lines 2—Menu keys and indicator lights 3—Navigation keys and indicator lights 4—Operation keys and indicator lights a—Status line b—Operator data lines c—Status messages
Fig. 63 — VFD Graphical Local Control Panel
a30-5857
Fig. 64 — Status Display I
a30-5935
Fig. 65 — Status Display II
IMPORTANT: The VFDs are configured through the Touch Pilot controls, and parameters should not be changed manually. This section is included for informa­tion and troubleshooting purposes only.
NOTE: The following instructions apply to the Danfoss VLT variable frequency drive (VFD).
The VFD can be operated in 2 ways:
• Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP)
• RS-485 serial communication for PC connection Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP)
— The LCD display
is divided into 4 functional groups:
1. Graphical display with Status lines
2. Menu keys and indicator lights (LEDs) — selecting mode, changing parameters and switching between dis­play functions
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs)
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs)
See Fig. 63.
when not in [Status] mode, or in case of an alarm or warning (alert).
b. The operator data line in the middle section shows
up to 5 variables with their related units, regardless of status. In the case of an alarm or warning, the warning is shown instead of the variables.
c. The status line in the bottom section always shows
the state of the VFD in Status mode.
The operator can toggle among 3 status read-out screens by pressing the Status key. Several values or measurements can be linked to each of the displayed operating variables. The values/measurements to be displayed can be defined via parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, 0-23 Display Line 2 Large and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large. The settings are accessed by selecting QUICK MENU Q3 Function Setups Q3-1 General Settings  Q3-13 Display Set­tings. Each value/measurement readout parameter selected in 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has its own scale and number of digits after a possible deci­mal point. Larger numeric values are displayed with fewer digits after the decimal point. For example, a current read­out might be 5.25 A,15.2 A, or 105 A.
Status Display I is standard after start-up or initialization. Press [INFO] to obtain information about the value/measure­ment linked to the displayed operating variables 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2, and 3). See the operating variables shown in the display in Fig. 64. Variables 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 are shown in small size. Variables 2 and 3 are shown in medium size.
The display is backlit with a total of 6 alpha-numeric lines. All data is displayed on the GLCP, which can show up to 5 op­erating variables while in Status mode.
The display lines (see items a-c in Fig. 63) function as follows:
a. The Status line at the top of the display shows VFD
status when in [Status] mode or up to 2 variables
Status Display II shows the operating variables 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 2. In the example shown in Fig. 65, Speed, Motor Current, Motor Power, and Frequency are selected as variables in the first and second lines. Variables 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 are shown in small size. Variable 2 is shown in large size.
71
Page 72
Status Display III shows events and actions of the Smart
a30-5859
Fig. 66 — Status Display III
a30-5856
Fig. 67 — Indicator Lights
Logic Control. Figure 66 shows an example.
The operator can adjust the display brightness by pressing
Status and ▲ to darken the display or ▼ to lighten it.
Indicator lights (LEDs) indicate whether the unit is on and if
there are any warning or alarm conditions:
• Green LED (On): Control section is working. The On LED is activated when the VFD receives power from mains voltage, a DC bus terminal, or an external 24 V supply. At the same time, the back light is on.
•Yellow LED (Warn.): Indicates a warning.
• Flashing Red LED (Alarm): Indicates an alarm. The warning and/or alarm LEDs light up if certain threshold
values are exceeded. A status message and alarm text also ap­pear on the control panel. See Fig. 67.
The menu keys below the display and indicator lights in-
clude Status, Quick Menu, Main Menu, and Alarm Log. The Status menu indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the motor. Three display modes are available (see Fig. 64-66). Use the Status key for selecting mode of dis­play or for changing back to display mode from the Quick Menu Mode, the Main Menu Mode, or the Alarm Log mode. The operator can also use the Status key to toggle be­tween single or double read-out mode.
The Quick Menu key allows quick set-up of the frequency
converter. The most common HVAC functions can be pro­grammed here. Menu options include:
• My Personal Menu
• Quick Set-up
• Function Set-up
• Changes Made
• Loggings
The Function Set-up option provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for most HVAC applications. Among other features it also includes parameters for selecting which
variables to display on the local control panel, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog references, closed loop single-zone and multi-zone applications, and specific functions related to fans, pumps and compressors.
The Quick Menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via 0-60 Main Menu Pass­word, 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password, 0-65 Personal Menu Password, or 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Pass­word. It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
The Main Menu key is used for programming all parame­ters. These can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via 0-60 Main Menu Password, 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password, 0-65 Personal Menu Password, or 0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password. For most HVAC applications it is not necessary to access the Main Menu pa­rameters but instead use the Quick Menu. Quick Set-up and Function Set-up provides the simplest and quickest access to the typical required parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode and Quick Menu mode. The parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing the Main Menu key for 3 seconds. The parame­ter shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.
Press Alarm Log to display a list of the 10 latest alarms (numbered A1-A10). To obtain additional details about an alarm, press the navigation keys to reach the alarm number and press OK. Information is displayed about the condition of the frequency converter before it enters the alarm mode. The Alarm Log key also provides access to a Maintenance log.
At the middle part of the local control panel, the Back key reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation structure. The Cancel key cancels the last change or command as long as the display has not changed. The Info Key displays information about a command, parameter, or function in any display win­dow, providing detailed information when needed. The four ar­row keys are used among menu options by moving the cursor in the direction indicated. Press OK to select a parameter marked by the cursor or to enable a parameter change.
Operation keys for local control are found at the bottom of the control panel (see Fig. 63). Hand On enables control of the frequency converter via the local control panel. Hand On also starts the motor, and it is possible to enter the motor speed data by means of the navigation keys. The key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-40 Hand On Key on the local con­trol panel.
NOTE: External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus override a start command via the local control panel.
The Off key stops the connected motor. If no external stop function is selected and Off key is inactive, the motor can only be stopped by disconnecting the mains supply.
Auto On enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the frequency converter starts.
NOTE: An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via digital inputs has higher priority than the local control keys Hand On –Auto On.
The Reset key resets the frequency converter after an alarm (trip).
VFD STATUS — The current operating status and conditions of the VFDs can be viewed with the Touch Pilot™ controls.
Compressor VFD Status
— To view the operating status of the compressor VFDs, follow the Touch Pilot path: Main Menu Maintenance Menu  VLT Drive Maintenance. This menu shows current operating conditions for both drives: Drive Power, Amps, Voltage, Speed, Frequency,
72
Page 73
Torque, DC Link Voltage, Heat Sink Temperature, Control Card Temperature, Heater Status, and Communication Status.
Fan VFD Status
— To view the operating status of the fan VFDs, follow the Touch Pilot path: Main Menu Mainte­nance Menu Fan Drive Maintenance. This menu shows cur­rent operating conditions for both drives: Drive Power, Amps, Voltage, Speed, Frequency, Torque, DC Link Voltage, Heat Sink Temperature and Control Card Temperature. To view the communication status of the fan VFDs, use the TouchPilot (Main Menu Maintenance Menu Fan Drive Addressing).
Table 45 — Compressor VFD Parameters for 200 V/60 Hz Units, 30XV140-200
VFD CONFIGURATION TABLES — The configuration parameters for the VFDs are stored in the control system and are automatically sent to the drives when addressed. The pa­rameters should not need to be changed, but are included as a reference for verification and troubleshooting. See Table 44 for compressor usage. See Tables 45-69 for compressor and fan VFD parameters.
Table 44 — Compressor Usage
30XV UNIT SIZE
140 - 200 06ZCE1 06ZCE1
225 06ZFC2 06ZCE1
250 - 325 06ZFC2 06ZFC2
COMPRESSOR MODELS
CKT A CKT B
PARAMETER
NUMBER
0-40 hand on button disabled 00000000 1-03 torque profile Compressor Torque 00000000 1-20 motor kW size dependent 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 1-22 motor volts motor dependent 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 1-23 motor frequency motor dependent 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 1-24 motor amperage size dependent 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 1-25 motor rpm size dependent 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 1-71 compressor start delay 0s 00000000 1-78 starting frequency 26hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 1-79 Comp start max time to trip 5s 55555555 1-80 function at stop coast 00000000 1-90 motor thermal protection 0 00000000 3-02 min ref 0 00000000 3-03 max reference size dependent 75 75 85 85 95 95 105 105 3-13 type reference remote 11111111 3-15 src ref#1 no function 00000000 3-16 src ref#2 no function 00000000 3-41 ramp up 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-42 ramp down 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-82 starting ramp time 3s 33333333 4-10 motor speed direct clockwise 00000000 4-12 motor speed low limit 26Hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 4-14 motor speed high limit 95Hz 75 75 85 85 95 95 105 105 4-16 torque limit size dependent 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 4-18 current limit size dependent 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 4-19 max output frequency size dependent 76 76 86 86 96 96 106 106
5-12 DI #27 Coast Inverse 22222222
5-19 DI#37 safe stop safe stop alarm 11111111
5-40[36] relay 1 control word bit 11 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
5-40[5] relay 2 running 55555555
8_01 control site digital & control word 00000000
8-02 source contrôle FC port=RS485 11111111 8-03 time out time 10s 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
8-04 time out function stop and trip 55555555 14-01 switching frequency 3kHz 44444444 14-03 overmodulation yes 11111111 14-10 main failure alarm 66666666 14-11 Mains voltage at Mains fault 160V 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 14-50 RFI Filter on 11111111 14-60 function at overtemp derate 11111111 14-61 inverter overload derate 11111111
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION SETTING DESCRIPTION
30XV140 30XV160 30XV180 30XV200
CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B
73
Page 74
Table 46 — Compressor VFD Parameters for 380 V/60 Hz Units, 30XV140-225
PARAMETER
NUMBER
0-40 hand on button disabled 0000000000 1-03 torque profile Compressor Torque 0000000000 1-20 motor kW size dependent 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 160 97 1-22 motor volts motor dependent 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 1-23 motor frequency motor dependent 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 98 105 1-24 motor amperage size dependent 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 321 200 1-25 motor rpm size dependent 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 5830 6240 1-71 compressor start delay 0s 0000000000 1-78 starting frequency 26hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 1-79 Comp start max time to trip 5s 5555555555 1-80 function at stop coast 0000000000 1-90 motor thermal protection 0 0000000000 3-02 min ref 0 0000000000 3-03 max reference size dependent 75 75 85 85 95 95 105 105 83 93 3-13 type reference remote 1111111111 3-15 src ref#1 no function 0000000000 3-16 src ref#2 no function 0000000000 3-41 ramp up 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-42 ramp down 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-82 starting ramp time 3s 3333333333 4-10 motor speed direct clockwise 0000000000 4-12 motor speed low limit 26Hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 4-14 motor speed high limit 95Hz 75 75 85 85 95 95 105 105 83 93 4-16 torque limit size dependent 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 4-18 current limit size dependent 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 4-19 max output frequency size dependent 76 76 86 86 96 96 106 106 84 94
5-12 DI #27 Coast Inverse 2222222222
5-19 DI#37 safe stop safe stop alarm 1111111111
5-40[36] relay 1 control word bit 11 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
5-40[5] relay 2 running 5555555555
8_01 control site digital & control word 0000000000
8-02 source contrôle FC port=RS485 1111111111 8-03 time out time 10s 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
8-04 time out function stop and trip 5555555555 14-01 switching frequency 3kHz 4444444444 14-03 overmodulation yes 1111111111 14-10 main failure alarm 6666666666 14-11 Mains voltage at Mains fault 300V 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 14-50 RFI Filter on 1111111111 14-60 function at overtemp derate 1111111111 14-61 inverter overload derate 1111111111
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
SETTING
DESCRIPTION
30XV140 30XV160 30XV180 30XV200 30XV225
CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B
74
Page 75
Table 47 — Compressor VFD Parameters for 380 V/60 Hz Units, 30XV250-325
PARAMETER
NUMBER
0-40 hand on button disabled 00000000 1-03 torque profile Compressor Torque 00000000 1-20 motor kW size dependent 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 1-22 motor volts motor dependent 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 1-23 motor frequency motor dependent 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 1-24 motor amperage size dependent 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 321 1-25 motor rpm size dependent 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 1-71 compressor start delay 0s 00000000 1-78 starting frequency 26hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 1-79 Comp start max time to trip 5s 55555555 1-80 function at stop coast 00000000 1-90 motor thermal protection 0 00000000 3-02 min ref 0 00000000 3-03 max reference size dependent 80 80 85 85 90 90 98 98 3-13 type reference remote 11111111 3-15 src ref#1 no function 00000000 3-16 src ref#2 no function 00000000 3-41 ramp up 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-42 ramp down 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-82 starting ramp time 3s 33333333 4-10 motor speed direct clockwise 00000000 4-12 motor speed low limit 26Hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 4-14 motor speed high limit 95Hz 80 80 85 85 90 90 98 98 4-16 torque limit size dependent 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 4-18 current limit size dependent 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 4-19 max output frequency size dependent 81 81 86 86 91 91 99 99
5-12 DI #27 Coast Inverse 22222222
5-19 DI#37 safe stop safe stop alarm 11111111
5-40[36] relay 1 control word bit 11 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
5-40[5] relay 2 running 55555555
8_01 control site digital & control word 00000000
8-02 source contrôle FC port=RS485 11111111 8-03 time out time 10s 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
8-04 time out function stop and trip 55555555 14-01 switching frequency 3kHz 44444444 14-03 overmodulation yes 11111111 14-10 main failure alarm 66666666 14-11 Mains voltage at Mains fault 300V 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 14-50 RFI Filter on 11111111 14-60 function at overtemp derate 11111111 14-61 inverter overload derate 11111111
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION SETTING DESCRIPTION
30XV250 30XV275 30XV300 30XV325
CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B
75
Page 76
Table 48 — Compressor VFD Parameters for 460-575 V/60 Hz Units, 30XV140-225
PARAMETER
NUMBER
0-40 hand on button disabled 0000000000 1-03 torque profile Compressor Torque 0000000000 1-20 motor kW size dependent 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 160 97 1-22 motor volts motor dependent 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 1-23 motor frequency motor dependent 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 98 105 1-24 motor amperage size dependent 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 265 165 1-25 motor rpm size dependent 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 6240 5830 6240 1-71 compressor start delay 0s 0000000000 1-78 starting frequency 26hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 1-79 Comp start max time to trip 5s 555555 555 1-80 function at stop coast 0000000000 1-90 motor thermal protection 0 0000000000 3-02 min ref 0 0000000000 3-03 max reference size dependent 75 75 85 85 95 95 105 105 83 93 3-13 type reference remote 1111111111 3-15 src ref#1 no function 0000000000 3-16 src ref#2 no function 0000000000 3-41 ramp up 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-42 ramp down 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-82 starting ramp time 3s 3333333333 4-10 motor speed direct clockwise 0000000000 4-12 motor speed low limit 26Hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 4-14 motor speed high limit 95Hz 75 75 85 85 95 95 105 105 83 93 4-16 torque limit size dependent 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 4-18 current limit size dependent 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 4-19 max output frequency size dependent 76 76 86 86 96 96 106 106 84 94
5-12 DI #27 Coast Inverse 2222222222
5-19 DI#37 safe stop safe stop alarm 1111111111
5-40[36] relay 1 control word bit 11 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
5-40[5] relay 2 running 5555555555
8_01 control site digital & control word 0000000000
8-02 source contrôle FC port=RS485 1111111111 8-03 time out time 10s 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
8-04 time out function stop and trip 5555555555 14-01 switching frequency 3kHz 4444444444 14-03 overmodulation yes 1111111111 14-10 main failure alarm 6666666666 14-11 Mains voltage at Mains fault 345V 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 14-50 RFI Filter on 1111111111 14-60 function at overtemp derate 1111111111 14-61 inverter overload derate 1111111111
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION SETTING DESCRIPTION
30XV140 30XV160 30XV180 30XV200 30XV225
CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B
76
Page 77
Table 49 — Compressor VFD Parameters for 460-575 V/60 Hz Units, 30XV250-325
PARAMETER
NUMBER
0-40 hand on button disabled 00000000 1-03 torque profile Compressor Torque 00000000 1-20 motor kW size dependent 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 1-22 motor volts motor dependent 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 1-23 motor frequency motor dependent 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 1-24 motor amperage size dependent 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 265 1-25 motor rpm size dependent 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 5830 1-71 compressor start delay 0s 00000000 1-78 starting frequency 26hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 1-79 Comp start max time to trip 5s 55555555 1-80 function at stop coast 00000000 1-90 motor thermal protection 0 00000000 3-02 min ref 0 00000000 3-03 max reference size dependent 80 80 85 85 90 90 98 98 3-13 type reference remote 11111111 3-15 src ref#1 no function 00000000 3-16 src ref#2 no function 00000000 3-41 ramp up 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-42 ramp down 100s 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 3-82 starting ramp time 3s 33333333 4-10 motor speed direct clockwise 00000000 4-12 motor speed low limit 26Hz 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 4-14 motor speed high limit 95Hz 80 80 85 85 90 90 98 98 4-16 torque limit size dependent 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 4-18 current limit size dependent 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 4-19 max output frequency size dependent 81 81 86 86 91 91 99 99
5-12 DI #27 Coast Inverse 22222222
5-19 DI#37 safe stop safe stop alarm 11111111
5-40[36] relay 1 control word bit 11 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
5-40[5] relay 2 running 55555555
8_01 control site digital & control word 00000000
8-02 source contrôle FC port=RS485 11111111 8-03 time out time 10s 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
8-04 time out function stop and trip 55555555 14-01 switching frequency 3kHz 44444444 14-03 overmodulation yes 11111111 14-10 main failure alarm 66666666 14-11 Mains voltage at Mains fault 345V 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 345 14-50 RFI Filter on 11111111 14-60 function at overtemp derate 11111111 14-61 inverter overload derate 11111111
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION SETTING DESCRIPTION
30XV250 30XV275 30XV300 30XV325
CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B CKT A CKT B
77
Page 78
Table 50 — Fan VFD Parameters, Standard Tier, 30XV140-180
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200—200—380—380—460—460—575—575—
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20—20—20—20—20—20—20—20— 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20—20—20—20—20—20—20—20—
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 6.73 — 6.73 — 3.326 — 3.326 — 3.030 — 3.030 — 2.474 — 2.474 — 24-93 -0.0614 — -0.0614 — -0.0058 — -0.0058 — -0.0270 — -0.0270 — -0.0175 — -0.0175 — 24-94 11.961 — 11.961 — 7.722 — 7.722 — 5.004 — 5.004 — 5.178 — 5.178 — 24-95 24-96 0.0659 — 0.0659 — 0.0431 — 0.0431 — 0.0287 — 0.0287 — 0.0287 — 0.0287 — 24-97 0.2053 — 0.2053 — 1.237 — 1.237 — 0.8926 — 0.8926 — 0.8926 — 0.8926 — 24-98 0.1073 — 0.1073 — 0.0701 — 0.0701 — 0.0467 — 0.0467 — 0.0467 — 0.0467 — 24-99 34.65 — 34.65 — 28.635 — 28.635 — 25.24 — 25.24 — 22.24 — 22.24 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY [4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60—60—60—60—60—60—60—60—
A 51.6 — 51.6 — 26.0 — 26.0 — 21.6 — 21.6 — 17.2 — 17.2 —
RPM 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60—60—60—60—60—60—60—60—
CLOCKWISE 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 5—5—5—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60—60—60—60—60—60—60—60—
150% 150—150—150—150—150—150—150—150—
110% 110—110—110—110—110—110—110—110—
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10—10—10—10—10—10—10—10—
STOP 2—2—2—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 6—6—6—6—6—6—6—6—
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
1—1—1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV140, 30XV160, 30XV180
78
Page 79
Table 51 — Fan VFD Parameters, Standard Tier, 30XV200
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 7.8 5.2 7.8 5.2 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200 200 200 200 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 6.73 2.00 4.00 2.00 4.00 — 4.00 — 3.6 — 3.6 — 3.00 — 3.00 — 24-93 -0.0614 -0.0184 -0.0368 -0.0184 -0.0069 — -0.0069 — -0.0323 — -0.0323 — -0.021 — -0.021 — 24-94 11.961 3.588 7.177 3.588 0.9266 — 0.9266 — 6.005 — 6.005 — 6.21 — 6.21 — 24-95 24-96 0.0659 0.0330 0.0495 0.0330 0.0539 — 0.0539 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 24-97 0.2053 1.0265 1.5398 1.0265 1.546 — 1.546 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 24-98 0.1073 0.0540 0.0805 0.0540 0.0877 — 0.0877 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 24-99 34.65 26.33 30.49 26.33 31.29 — 31.29 — 27.05 — 27.05 — 27.05 — 27.05 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 38.7 25.8 38.7 25.8 32.5 — 32.5 — 27.0 — 27.0 — 21.5 — 21.5 —
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 55555—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 150 150 150 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 110 110 110 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 22222—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 66666—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
00000—0—0—0—0—0—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV200
79
Page 80
Table 52 — Fan VFD Parameters, Standard Tier, 30XV225
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 15.6 — 10.4 — 15.6 — 10.4 — 15.6 — 10.4 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 0—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 0—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 0—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 4.989 — 3.326 — 4.504 — 3.030 — 3.711 — 2.474 — 24-93 -0.0087 — -0.0058 — -0.0404 — -0.0270 — -0.0262 — -0.0175 — 24-94 11.582 — 7.722 — 7.506 — 5.004 — 7.767 — 5.178 — 24-95 24-96 0.0647 — 0.0431 — 0.043 — 0.0287 — 0.043 — 0.0287 — 24-97 1.856 — 1.237 — 1.3389 — 0.8926 — 1.3389 — 0.8926 — 24-98 0.1052 — 0.0701 — 0.07 — 0.0467 — 0.07 — 0.0467 — 24-99 33.95 — 28.635 — 28.86 — 25.24 — 28.86 — 22.24 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 39.0 — 26.0 — 32.4 — 21.6 — 25.8 — 17.2 —
RPM 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 0—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 5—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 2—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 6—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
0—0—0—0—0—0—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
380V 460V 575V
30XV225
80
Page 81
Table 53 — Fan VFD Parameters, Standard Tier, 30XV250-275
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 0—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 0—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 0—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 4.989 — 4.989 — 4.504 — 4.504 — 3.711 — 3.711 — 24-93 -0.0087 — -0.0087 — -0.0404 — -0.0404 — -0.0262 — -0.0262 — 24-94 11.582 — 11.582 — 7.506 — 7.506 — 7.767 — 7.767 — 24-95 24-96 0.0647 — 0.0647 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 24-97 1.856 — 1.856 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 24-98 0.1052 — 0.1052 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 24-99 33.95 — 33.95 — 28.86 — 28.86 — 28.86 — 28.86 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 39.0 — 39.0 — 32.4 — 32.4 — 25.8 — 25.8 —
RPM 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 0—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 5—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 2—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 6—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
0—0—0—0—0—0—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
380V 460V 575V
30XV250, 30XV275
81
Page 82
Table 54 — Fan VFD Parameters, Standard Tier, 30XV300
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 0—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 0—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 0—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 6.00 — 6.00 — 5.4 — 5.4 — 4.5 — 4.5 — 24-93 -0.0104 — -0.0104 — -0.0485 — -0.0485 — -0.0315 — -0.0315 — 24-94 13.899 — 13.899 — 9.007 — 9.007 — 9.32 — 9.32 — 24-95 24-96 0.0755 — 0.0755 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 24-97 2.165 — 2.165 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 24-98 0.1227 — 0.1227 — 0.08 — 0.08 — 0.082 — 0.082 — 24-99 36.61 — 36.61 — 30.67 — 30.67 — 30.67 — 30.67 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 45.5 — 45.5 — 37.8 — 37.8 — 30.1 — 30.1 —
RPM 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 0—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 5—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 2—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 6—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
0—0—0—0—0—0—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
380V 460V 575V
30XV300
82
Page 83
Table 55 — Fan VFD Parameters, Standard Tier, 30XV325
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 380 380 380 460 460 460 460 575 575 575 575
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 000000000000 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 000000000000
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 000000000000 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 000000000000 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 000000000000 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 000000000000
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 000000000000
14-01
24-90 24-91 000000000000 24-92 4.00 3.326 4.00 1.00 3.6 3.030 3.6 0.9 3.00 2.474 3.00 1.00 24-93 -0.0069 -0.0058 -0.0069 -0.0017 -0.0323 -0.0270 -0.0323 -0.0081 -0.021 -0.0175 -0.021 -0.005 24-94 0.9266 7.722 0.9266 2.317 6.005 5.004 6.005 1.501 6.21 5.178 6.21 1.55 24-95 24-96 0.0539 0.0431 0.0539 0.0216 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.014 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.014 24-97 1.546 1.237 1.546 0.619 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.4463 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.4463 24-98 0.0877 0.0701 0.0877 0.0351 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.023 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.023 24-99 31.29 28.635 31.29 23.32 27.05 25.24 27.05 21.62 27.05 22.24 27.05 21.62
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
A 32.5 26.0 32.5 13.0 27.0 21.6 27.0 10.8 21.5 17.2 21.5 8.6
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140
NO OPERATION 000000000000
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
CLOCKWISE 000000000000
5HZ 555555555555
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
150% 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
110% 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
STOP 222222222222
KHZ 666666666666
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
000000000000
111111111111
111111111111
111111111111
380V 460V 575V
30XV325
83
Page 84
Table 56 — Fan VFD Parameters, Mid Tier, 30XV140
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 10.4 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200—200—380—380—460—460—575—575—
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20—20—20—20—20—20—20—20— 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20—20—20—20—20—20—20—20—
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 6.73 — 6.73 — 3.326 — 3.326 — 3.030 — 3.030 — 2.474 — 2.474 — 24-93 -0.0614 — -0.0614 — -0.0058 — -0.0058 — -0.0270 — -0.0270 — -0.0175 — -0.0175 — 24-94 11.961 — 11.961 — 7.722 — 7.722 — 5.004 — 5.004 — 5.178 — 5.178 — 24-95 24-96 0.0659 — 0.0659 — 0.0431 — 0.0431 — 0.0287 — 0.0287 — 0.0287 — 0.0287 — 24-97 0.2053 — 0.2053 — 1.237 — 1.237 — 0.8926 — 0.8926 — 0.8926 — 0.8926 — 24-98 0.1073 — 0.1073 — 0.0701 — 0.0701 — 0.0467 — 0.0467 — 0.0467 — 0.0467 — 24-99 34.65 — 34.65 — 28.635 — 28.635 — 25.24 — 25.24 — 22.24 — 22.24 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60—60—60—60—60—60—60—60—
A 51.6 — 51.6 — 26.0 — 26.0 — 21.6 — 21.6 — 17.2 — 17.2 —
RPM 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60—60—60—60—60—60—60—60—
CLOCKWISE 0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 5—5—5—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60—60—60—60—60—60—60—60—
150% 150—150—150—150—150—150—150—150—
110% 110—110—110—110—110—110—110—110—
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10—10—10—10—10—10—10—10—
STOP 2—2—2—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 6—6—6—6—6—6—6—6—
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
0—0—0—0—0—0—0—0—
1—1—1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV140
84
Page 85
Table 57 — Fan VFD Parameters, Mid Tier, 30XV160-180
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 7.8 5.2 7.8 5.2 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200 200 200 200 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 4.00 2.00 4.00 2.00 4.00 — 4.00 — 3.6 — 3.6 — 3.00 — 3.00 — 24-93 -0.0368 -0.0184 -0.0368 -0.0184 -0.0069 — -0.0069 — -0.0323 — -0.0323 — -0.021 — -0.021 — 24-94 7.177 3.588 7.177 3.588 0.9266 — 0.9266 — 6.005 — 6.005 — 6.21 — 6.21 — 24-95 24-96 0.0495 0.0330 0.0495 0.0330 0.0539 — 0.0539 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 24-97 1.5398 1.0265 1.5398 1.0265 1.546 — 1.546 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 24-98 0.0805 0.0540 0.0805 0.0540 0.0877 — 0.0877 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 24-99 30.49 26.33 30.49 26.33 31.29 — 31.29 — 27.05 — 27.05 — 27.05 — 27.05 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 38.7 25.8 38.7 25.8 32.5 — 32.5 — 27.0 — 27.0 — 21.5 — 21.5 —
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 55555—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 150 150 150 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 110 110 110 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 22222—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 66666—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
00000—0—0—0—0—0—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV160, 30XV180
85
Page 86
Table 58 — Fan VFD Parameters, Mid Tier, 30XV200
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20
1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200 200 200 200 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.989 — 4.989 — 4.504 — 4.504 — 3.711 — 3.711 — 24-93 -0.0368 -0.0368 -0.0368 -0.0368 -0.0087 — -0.0087 — -0.0404 — -0.0404 — -0.0262 — -0.0262 — 24-94 7.177 7.177 7.177 7.177 11.582 — 11.582 — 7.506 — 7.506 — 7.767 — 7.767 — 24-95 24-96 0.0495 0.0495 0.0495 0.0495 0.0647 — 0.0647 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 24-97 1.5398 1.5398 1.5398 1.5398 1.856 — 1.856 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 24-98 0.0805 0.0805 0.0805 0.0805 0.1052 — 0.1052 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 24-99 30.49 30.49 30.49 30.49 33.95 — 33.95 — 28.86 — 28.86 — 28.86 — 28.86 —
MOTOR POWER
KW
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
KW 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 —
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 38.7 38.7 38.7 38.7 39.0 — 39.0 — 32.4 — 32.4 — 25.8 — 25.8 —
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 55555—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 150 150 150 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 110 110 110 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 22222—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 66666—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
00000—0—0—0—0—0—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV200
86
Page 87
Table 59 — Fan VFD Parameters, Mid Tier, 30XV225
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 18.2 — 13.0 — 18.2 — 13.0 — 18.2 — 13.0 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 0—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 0—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 0—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 6.00 — 4.00 — 5.4 — 3.6 — 4.5 — 3.00 — 24-93 -0.0104 — -0.0069 — -0.0485 — -0.0323 — -0.0315 — -0.021 — 24-94 13.899 — 0.9266 — 9.007 — 6.005 — 9.32 — 6.21 — 24-95 24-96 0.0755 — 0.0539 — 0.05 — 0.036 — 0.05 — 0.036 — 24-97 2.165 — 1.546 — 1.5621 — 1.1158 — 1.5621 — 1.1158 — 24-98 0.1227 — 0.0877 — 0.08 — 0.058 — 0.082 — 0.058 — 24-99 36.61 — 31.29 — 30.67 — 27.05 — 30.67 — 27.05 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 45.5 — 32.5 — 37.8 — 27.0 — 30.1 — 21.5 —
RPM 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 0—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 5—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 2—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 6—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
0—0—0—0—0—0—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
380V 460V 575V
30XV225
87
Page 88
Table 60 — Fan VFD Parameters, Mid Tier, 30XV250-275
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 0—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 0—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 0—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 0—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 6.00 — 6.00 — 5.4 — 5.4 — 4.5 — 4.5 — 24-93 -0.0104 — -0.0104 — -0.0485 — -0.0485 — -0.0315 — -0.0315 — 24-94 13.899 — 13.899 — 9.007 — 9.007 — 9.32 — 9.32 — 24-95 24-96 0.0755 — 0.0755 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 24-97 2.165 — 2.165 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 24-98 0.1227 — 0.1227 — 0.08 — 0.08 — 0.082 — 0.082 — 24-99 36.61 — 36.61 — 30.67 — 30.67 — 30.67 — 30.67 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 45.5 — 45.5 — 37.8 — 37.8 — 30.1 — 30.1 —
RPM 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 0—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 0—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 5—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 2—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 6—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
0—0—0—0—0—0—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
1—1—1—1—1—1—
380V 460V 575V
30XV250, 30XV275
88
Page 89
Table 61 — Fan VFD Parameters, Mid Tier, 30XV300
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 380 380 380 460 460 460 460 575 575 575 575
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 000000000000 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 000000000000
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 000000000000 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 000000000000 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 000000000000 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 000000000000
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 000000000000
14-01
24-90 24-91 000000000000 24-92 4.00 3.326 4.00 1.00 3.6 3.030 3.6 0.9 3.00 2.474 3.00 1.00 24-93 -0.0069 -0.0058 -0.0069 -0.0017 -0.0323 -0.0270 -0.0323 -0.0081 -0.021 -0.0175 -0.021 -0.005 24-94 0.9266 7.722 0.9266 2.317 6.005 5.004 6.005 1.501 6.21 5.178 6.21 1.55 24-95 24-96 0.0539 0.0431 0.0539 0.0216 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.014 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.014 24-97 1.546 1.237 1.546 0.619 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.4463 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.4463 24-98 0.0877 0.0701 0.0877 0.0351 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.023 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.023 24-99 31.29 28.635 31.29 23.32 27.05 25.24 27.05 21.62 27.05 22.24 27.05 21.62
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
A 32.5 26.0 32.5 13.0 27.0 21.6 27.0 10.8 21.5 17.2 21.5 8.6
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140
NO OPERATION 000000000000
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
CLOCKWISE 000000000000
5HZ 555555555555
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
150% 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
110% 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
STOP 222222222222
KHZ 666666666666
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
000000000000
111111111111
111111111111
111111111111
380V 460V 575V
30XV300
89
Page 90
Table 62 — Fan VFD Parameters, Mid Tier, 30XV325
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 380 380 380 460 460 460 460 575 575 575 575
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 000000000000 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 000000000000
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 000000000000 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 000000000000 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 000000000000 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 000000000000
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 000000000000
14-01
24-90 24-91 000000000000 24-92 4.00 3.326 4.00 3.326 3.6 3.030 3.6 3.030 3.00 2.474 3.00 2.474 24-93 -0.0069 -0.0058 -0.0069 -0.0058 -0.0323 -0.0270 -0.0323 -0.0270 -0.021 -0.0175 -0.021 -0.0175 24-94 0.9266 7.722 0.9266 7.722 6.005 5.004 6.005 5.004 6.21 5.178 6.21 5.178 24-95 24-96 0.0539 0.0431 0.0539 0.0431 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.0287 24-97 1.546 1.237 1.546 1.237 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.8926 24-98 0.0877 0.0701 0.0877 0.0701 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.0467 24-99 31.29 28.635 31.29 28.635 27.05 25.24 27.05 25.24 27.05 22.24 27.05 22.24
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
A 32.5 26.0 32.5 26.0 27.0 21.6 27.0 21.6 21.5 17.2 21.5 17.2
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140
NO OPERATION 000000000000
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
CLOCKWISE 000000000000
5HZ 555555555555
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
150% 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
110% 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
STOP 222222222222
KHZ 666666666666
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
000000000000
111111111111
111111111111
111111111111
380V 460V 575V
30XV325
90
Page 91
Table 63 — Fan VFD Parameters, High Tier, 30XV140
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 7.8 5.2 7.8 5.2 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 13.0 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200 200 200 200 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 4.00 2.00 4.00 2.00 4.00 — 4.00 — 3.6 — 3.6 — 3.00 — 3.00 — 24-93 -0.0368 -0.0184 -0.0368 -0.0184 -0.0069 — -0.0069 — -0.0323 — -0.0323 — -0.021 — -0.021 — 24-94 7.177 3.588 7.177 3.588 0.9266 — 0.9266 — 6.005 — 6.005 — 6.21 — 6.21 — 24-95 24-96 0.0495 0.0330 0.0495 0.0330 0.0539 — 0.0539 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 0.036 — 24-97 1.5398 1.0265 1.5398 1.0265 1.546 — 1.546 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 1.1158 — 24-98 0.0805 0.0540 0.0805 0.0540 0.0877 — 0.0877 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 0.058 — 24-99 30.49 26.33 30.49 26.33 31.29 — 31.29 — 27.05 — 27.05 — 27.05 — 27.05 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 38.7 25.8 38.7 25.8 32.5 — 32.5 — 27.0 — 27.0 — 21.5 — 21.5 —
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 55555—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 150 150 150 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 110 110 110 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 22222—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 66666—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
00000—0—0—0—0—0—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV140
91
Page 92
Table 64 — Fan VFD Parameters, High Tier, 30XV160-180
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 15.6 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200 200 200 200 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.989 — 4.989 — 4.504 — 4.504 — 3.711 — 3.711 — 24-93 -0.0368 -0.0368 -0.0368 -0.0368 -0.0087 — -0.0087 — -0.0404 — -0.0404 — -0.0262 — -0.0262 — 24-94 7.177 7.177 7.177 7.177 11.582 — 11.582 — 7.506 — 7.506 — 7.767 — 7.767 — 24-95 24-96 0.0495 0.0495 0.0495 0.0495 0.0647 — 0.0647 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 0.043 — 24-97 1.5398 1.5398 1.5398 1.5398 1.856 — 1.856 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 1.3389 — 24-98 0.0805 0.0805 0.0805 0.0805 0.1052 — 0.1052 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 0.07 — 24-99 30.49 30.49 30.49 30.49 33.95 — 33.95 — 28.86 — 28.86 — 28.86 — 28.86 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 38.7 38.7 38.7 38.7 39.0 — 39.0 — 32.4 — 32.4 — 25.8 — 25.8 —
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 55555—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 150 150 150 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 110 110 110 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 22222—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 66666—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
00000—0—0—0—0—0—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV160, 30XV180
92
Page 93
Table 65 — Fan VFD Parameters, High Tier, 30XV200
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 10.4 7.8 10.4 7.8 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 18.2 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 200 200 200 200 380 — 380 — 460 — 460 — 575 — 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
14-01
24-90 24-91 00000—0—0—0—0—0— 24-92 6.73 4.00 6.73 4.00 6.00 — 6.00 — 5.4 — 5.4 — 4.5 — 4.5 — 24-93 -0.0614 -0.0368 -0.0614 -0.0368 -0.0104 — -0.0104 — -0.0485 — -0.0485 — -0.0315 — -0.0315 — 24-94 11.961 7.177 11.961 7.177 13.899 — 13.899 — 9.007 — 9.007 — 9.32 — 9.32 — 24-95 24-96 0.0659 0.0495 0.0659 0.0495 0.0755 — 0.0755 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 0.05 — 24-97 0.2053 1.5398 0.2053 1.5398 2.165 — 2.165 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 1.5621 — 24-98 0.1073 0.0805 0.1073 0.0805 0.1227 — 0.1227 — 0.08 — 0.08 — 0.082 — 0.082 — 24-99 34.65 30.49 34.65 30.49 36.61 — 36.61 — 30.67 — 30.67 — 30.67 — 30.67 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
A 51.6 38.7 51.6 38.7 45.5 — 45.5 — 37.8 — 37.8 — 30.1 — 30.1 —
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 — 1140 —
NO OPERATION 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
CLOCKWISE 00000—0—0—0—0—0—
5HZ 55555—5—5—5—5—5—
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 — 60 —
150% 150 150 150 150 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 — 150 —
110% 110 110 110 110 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 — 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
STOP 22222—2—2—2—2—2—
KHZ 66666—6—6—6—6—6—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
208/230V 380V 460V 575V
00000—0—0—0—0—0—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
11111—1—1—1—1—1—
30XV200
93
Page 94
Table 66 — Fan VFD Parameters, High Tier, 30XV225
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 10.4 10.4 15.6 — 10.4 10.4 15.6 — 10.4 10.4 15.6 — 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 380 380 — 460 460 460 — 575 575 575 —
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 000—000—000— 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 000—000—000—
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 000—000—000— 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 000—000—000— 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 000—000—000— 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 — 20 20 20 — 20 20 20 — 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 — 20 20 20 — 20 20 20 —
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 000—000—000—
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 000—000—000—
14-01
24-90 24-91 000—000—000— 24-92 3.326 3.326 4.989 — 3.030 3.030 4.504 — 2.474 2.474 3.711 — 24-93 -0.0058 -0.0058 -0.0087 — -0.0270 -0.0270 -0.0404 — -0.0175 -0.0175 -0.0262 — 24-94 7.722 7.722 11.582 — 5.004 5.004 7.506 — 5.178 5.178 7.767 — 24-95 24-96 0.0431 0.0431 0.0647 — 0.0287 0.0287 0.043 — 0.0287 0.0287 0.043 — 24-97 1.237 1.237 1.856 — 0.8926 0.8926 1.3389 — 0.8926 0.8926 1.3389 — 24-98 0.0701 0.0701 0.1052 — 0.0467 0.0467 0.07 — 0.0467 0.0467 0.07 — 24-99 28.635 28.635 33.95 — 25.24 25.24 28.86 — 22.24 22.24 28.86 —
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 — 60 60 60 — 60 60 60 —
A 26.0 26.0 39.0 — 21.6 21.6 32.4 — 17.2 17.2 25.8 —
RPM 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 1140 1140 — 1140 1140 1140 —
NO OPERATION 000—000—000—
HZ 60 60 60 — 60 60 60 — 60 60 60 —
CLOCKWISE 000—000—000—
5HZ 555—555—555—
60HZ 60 60 60 — 60 60 60 — 60 60 60 —
150% 150 150 150 — 150 150 150 — 150 150 150 —
110% 110 110 110 — 110 110 110 — 110 110 110 —
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 — 10 10 10 — 10 10 10 —
STOP 222—222—222—
KHZ 666—666—666—
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
000—000—000—
111—111—111—
111—111—111—
111—111—111—
380V 460V 575V
30XV225
94
Page 95
Table 67 — Fan VFD Parameters, High Tier, 30XV250-275
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 13.0 10.4 13.0 5.2 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 380 380 380 460 460 460 460 575 575 575 575
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 000000000000 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 000000000000
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 000000000000 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 000000000000 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 000000000000 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 000000000000
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 000000000000
14-01
24-90 24-91 000000000000 24-92 4.00 3.326 4.00 1.00 3.6 3.030 3.6 0.9 3.00 2.474 3.00 1.00 24-93 -0.0069 -0.0058 -0.0069 -0.0017 -0.0323 -0.0270 -0.0323 -0.0081 -0.021 -0.0175 -0.021 -0.005 24-94 0.9266 7.722 0.9266 2.317 6.005 5.004 6.005 1.501 6.21 5.178 6.21 1.55 24-95 24-96 0.0539 0.0431 0.0539 0.0216 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.014 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.014 24-97 1.546 1.237 1.546 0.619 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.4463 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.4463 24-98 0.0877 0.0701 0.0877 0.0351 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.023 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.023 24-99 31.29 28.635 31.29 23.32 27.05 25.24 27.05 21.62 27.05 22.24 27.05 21.62
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
A 32.5 26.0 32.5 13.0 27.0 21.6 27.0 10.8 21.5 17.2 21.5 8.6
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140
NO OPERATION 000000000000
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
CLOCKWISE 000000000000
5HZ 555555555555
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
150% 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
110% 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
STOP 222222222222
KHZ 666666666666
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
000000000000
111111111111
111111111111
111111111111
380V 460V 575V
30XV250, 30XV275
95
Page 96
Table 68 — Fan VFD Parameters, High Tier, 30XV300
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 13.0 10.4 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 380 380 380 460 460 460 460 575 575 575 575
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 000000000000 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 000000000000
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 000000000000 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 000000000000 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 000000000000 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 000000000000
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 000000000000
14-01
24-90 24-91 000000000000 24-92 4.00 3.326 4.00 3.326 3.6 3.030 3.6 3.030 3.00 2.474 3.00 2.474 24-93 -0.0069 -0.0058 -0.0069 -0.0058 -0.0323 -0.0270 -0.0323 -0.0270 -0.021 -0.0175 -0.021 -0.0175 24-94 0.9266 7.722 0.9266 7.722 6.005 5.004 6.005 5.004 6.21 5.178 6.21 5.178 24-95 24-96 0.0539 0.0431 0.0539 0.0431 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.0287 0.036 0.0287 24-97 1.546 1.237 1.546 1.237 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.8926 1.1158 0.8926 24-98 0.0877 0.0701 0.0877 0.0701 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.0467 0.058 0.0467 24-99 31.29 28.635 31.29 28.635 27.05 25.24 27.05 25.24 27.05 22.24 27.05 22.24
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP
PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
A 32.5 26.0 32.5 26.0 27.0 21.6 27.0 21.6 21.5 17.2 21.5 17.2
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140
NO OPERATION 000000000000
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
CLOCKWISE 000000000000
5HZ 555555555555
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
150% 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
110% 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
STOP 222222222222
KHZ 666666666666
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
000000000000
111111111111
111111111111
111111111111
380V 460V 575V
30XV300
96
Page 97
Table 69 — Fan VFD Parameters, High Tier, 30XV325
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ITEM
1-20 MOTOR POWER KW KW 15.6 10.4 15.6 10.4 15.6 10.4 15.6 10.4 15.6 10.4 15.6 10.4 1-22 MOTOR VOLTS V 380 380 380 380 460 460 460 460 575 575 575 575
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-73 FLYING RESTART NO 000000000000 1-80 FUNCTION AT STOP COAST 000000000000
1-90
3-03
3-13 TYPE REFERENCE HAND/AUTO 000000000000 3-15 SRC REF#1 NO 000000000000 3-16 SRC REF#2 NO 000000000000 3-41 RAMP UP 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 3-42 RAMP DOWN 20S 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
4-10
4-12
4-14
4-16
4-18
5-12 DI#27 NO OPERATION 000000000000
8-01 CONTROL SITE
8-02 CONTROL SOURCE
8-03
8-04
14-00 PATTERN [AVM] 60AVM 000000000000
14-01
24-90 24-91 000000000000 24-92 4.989 3.326 4.989 3.326 4.504 3.030 4.504 3.030 3.711 2.474 3.711 2.474 24-93 -0.0087 -0.0058 -0.0087 -0.0058 -0.0404 -0.0270 -0.0404 -0.0270 -0.0262 -0.0175 -0.0262 -0.0175 24-94 11.582 7.722 11.582 7.722 7.506 5.004 7.506 5.004 7.767 5.178 7.767 5.178 24-95 24-96 0.0647 0.0431 0.0647 0.0431 0.043 0.0287 0.043 0.0287 0.043 0.0287 0.043 0.0287 24-97 1.856 1.237 1.856 1.237 1.3389 0.8926 1.3389 0.8926 1.3389 0.8926 1.3389 0.8926 24-98 0.1052 0.0701 0.1052 0.0701 0.07 0.0467 0.07 0.0467 0.07 0.0467 0.07 0.0467 24-99 33.95 28.635 33.95 28.635 28.86 25.24 28.86 25.24 28.86 22.24 28.86 22.24
MOTOR FREQUENCY
[HZ]
MOTOR INTENSITY
[A]
MOTOR SPEED
[RPM]
MOTOR TEMP PROTECTION
MAX REFERENCE
[HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
DIRECTION
MOTOR SPEED
LOW LIMIT [HZ]
MOTOR SPEED
HIGH LIMIT [HZ]
TORQUE LIMIT
[%]
CURRENT LIMIT
[%]
CONTROL TIMEOUT
TIME
CONTROL TIMEOUT
FUNCTION
SWITCHING
FREQUENCY
[4KHZ]
MISSING MOTOR
LOCKED ROTOR
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
A 39.0 26.0 39.0 26.0 32.4 21.6 32.4 21.6 25.8 17.2 25.8 17.2
RPM 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140 1140
NO OPERATION 000000000000
HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
CLOCKWISE 000000000000
5HZ 555555555555
60HZ 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
150% 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
110% 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
DIGITAL AND
CONTROL
WORD
FC PORT=
RS485
10S 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
STOP 222222222222
KHZ 666666666666
A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2
000000000000
111111111111
111111111111
111111111111
380V 460V 575V
30XV325
97
Page 98
VFD ALARM RESET — As long as communication is es-
Fig. 68 — Fan Drive Wiring
Fig. 69 — Compressor Drive Wiring
tablished between the Touch Pilot™ controls and the VFD, most alarms can be reset directly through the chiller control system.
VFD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE — If required, VFDs can be replaced and programmed with the following procedures:
1. Disconnect power from unit. Wait a minimum of 20 min­utes before continuing.
WARNING
After unit power is disconnected, wait at least 20 minutes for the VFD capacitors to discharge before opening drive. Failure to do so presents an electrical shock hazard and may result in personal injury.
2. Remove VFD weatherproof cover. Disconnect electrical power and communication connections from drive.
3. Unbolt and remove drive from support brackets, taking care to support drive at all times during the procedure. Larger drives are equipped with lifting lugs which must be used to support the load.
CAUTION
Use all proper rigging procedures and precautions when moving VFDs to avoid damage to the equipment.
4. Lift, position, and fasten replacement drive to support structure. Tighten all bolts securely.
5. Connect power, control, VFD enable, and high pressure switch wiring to drive. For wiring details for fan drives see Fig 68. Use the same knockout openings on new drive as on drive being replaced. For compressor drives, the high-pressure switch, VFD enable, and heater wiring also need to be connected. See Fig. 69 for wiring details for compressor drives. For compressor drives, remove the blank gland plate from the new drive and install the pre­punched gland plate from the drive being replaced. Torque connections are shown in Table 70.
IMPORTANT: Ensure high pressure switch (HPS) and VFD enable wiring are connected to compressor VFD. Compressor will not run without HPS and VFD enable wiring connection.
98
Page 99
Table 70 — Power Connection Torque Values
Table 71 — VFD Drive Addresses
COMPRESSOR DRIVES
CARRIER PART
NO. HR46ZY001 HR46ZY002 HR46ZY003 HR46ZY004 HR46ZY005 HR46ZY006 HR46ZY007 HR46ZY008 HR46ZY009 HR46ZY010 HR46ZY011 HR46ZY012 HR46ZY013
HR46ZT002 HR46ZT003 HR46ZU002 HR46ZU003 HR46ZV001 HR46ZV002 HR46ZW001 HR46ZW002
LINE/MOTOR
POWER (in.-lb)
89 27
89 27 124 27 124 27 168 75 168 75 168 75 168 75 168 75 168 75 168 75 168 75 168 75
FAN DRIVES
16 27 16 27 16 27 16 27 22 27 22 27 22 27 22 27
GROUND (in.-lb)
6. Turn on power to the unit and allow the drive screen to become active. The drive will need to be manually ad­dressed for the control system to export the correct pa­rameters. Use this procedure to address the VFDs:
a. Using the display interface on the VFD drive, press
the Main Menu button twice. Navigate to menu item 8-30 and confirm that the LEN option is selected: Using the UP/DOWN arrows and OK button, fol­low the path: 8-** (Command Options) 8-3* (FC Port Settings) 8-30 (Protocol). If LEN is not selected, press the OK button and use the arrow keys to scroll through the options and select it. If no LEN option appears, LEN communication is not enabled on the drive. Follow the process described in the next section, Enable LEN Communication, and then complete the addressing procedure below.
b. Navigate to menu item 8-31 on the VFD display and
enter the address for the drive being configured: Fol­low the path: 8-** (Command Options) 8-3* (FC Port Settings) 8-31 (Address). Press the OK button and use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the drive address. See Table 71 to determine the correct address. For fan drives, see Fig. 68 for typical arrangement. For compressor drives, see Fig. 69 for typical location.
DRIVE ADDRESS Ckt A Compressor Ckt B Compressor Ckt A Fan Drive 1 Ckt A Fan Drive 2 Ckt B Fan Drive 1 Ckt B Fan Drive 2
LEGEND
VFD —Variable Frequency Drive
181 182 184 185 187 188
c. Turn the chiller power off and then on again. Cycling
the power will cause the control system to send the correct configuration data files to the new drive.
d. Verify that communication with the new drive has
been established. For fan drives follow the Touch Pilot™ path: Main Menu Maintenance Menu Fan Drive Addressing and confirm that the rele­vant Comm Fan Drive Xn status is Yes. For com­pressor drives follow the path: Main Menu Maintenance Menu VLT Drive Maintenance and confirm that the relevant Comm with Drive X status is Yes.
Enable LEN Communication
— If the replacement drive re­ceived does not have LEN as an option under menu item 8-30 on the VFD display, LEN will need to be manually enabled be­fore the drive can be addressed. To enable the LEN communi­cation option:
1. Enable access to the hidden Typecode Parameter by navigating to menu item 14-29 on the VFD display: press the Main Menu button and then follow the path 14-** (Special Functions)  14-2* (Reset Functions) 14-29 (Service Code). Set the 14-29 parameter to
00006100. Setting this parameter will enable access to hidden parameter 14-23 (Typecode Setting). Press OK.
2. Navigate to menu item 14-23: Press the BACK button and use the UP arrow to reach 14-23 (Typecode Setting). Press the OK button once. A cursor will appear on the value [00] just below the parameter number and name. Increase this value by pressing the UP key until the pa­rameter has a value of [12] and the display shows “[nnn] SXXX {std. sw).” Press OK and use the UP/DOWN but­tons to change the value to “[231 ] S009 {Special sw).” Press OK again. Press the UP button until the value is [20]. Press the OK button once, and change the displayed value to [1] (Save to EEPROM) using the arrow key. Press OK again.
3. The drive should display an alarm A251 New Type Code. Power down the drive by pressing the OFF button. Re­start the drive with the AUTO ON button.
4. Proceed with the Addressing VFD instruction above to complete the configuration process.
LONG TERM STORAGE — If the unit is to be stored for long periods of time without use, special procedures must be performed to ensure the safe and efficient operation of the VFD capacitor banks. If the unit has been stored for more than 3 years without power applied to the drives, contact Carrier Ser­vice to obtain information and instructions for reforming the capacitor banks.
99
Page 100

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule —
following are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite con­ditions may dictate that maintenance tasks be performed more often than recommended.
Routine: For machines with e-coat condenser coils:
• Check condenser coils for debris; clean as necessary with Carrier approved coil cleaner.
• Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and industrial applications.
Every month:
• Check condenser coils for debris; clean as necessary with Carrier approved coil cleaner.
• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig­erant loss and presence of moisture.
Every 3 months:
• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks; repair as necessary.
• Check chilled water flow switch operation.
• Check all condenser fans for proper operation.
• Check oil filter pressure drop.
• Check oil separator heater operation.
• Check air filters located on the front panel of the compres­sor VFD drives by opening the plastic grilles; replace clogged filters. Filters may be cleaned with mild detergent soap and water.
• Check the back of all the compressor and fan drives for any debris. If present clean it off by blowing air from top to bottom.
Every 12 months:
• Check refrigerant charge.
• Check all electrical connections; tighten as necessary.
• Inspect all contactors and relays; replace as necessary.
• Check accuracy of thermistors; replace if greater than ±2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.
• Check accuracy of transducers; replace if greater than ±5 psig (34.47 kPa) variance.
• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti­freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.
• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.
• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop; replace as necessary.
• Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.
• Check evaporator heater operation.
• Check oil heater operation.
• Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they are securely fastened to the motor shaft.
• Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components.
• Check for excessive evaporator approach (Leaving Chilled Water Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) which may indicate fouling. Clean evaporator vessel if necessary.
• Obtain oil analysis; change as necessary.
The

TROUBLESHOOTING

mal or fault conditions occur. Alarms may cause either a circuit (Alert) or the whole machine (Alarm) to shut down. Alarms and Alerts are assigned codes as described in Table 72.
To view information about current and past alarms or to re­set alarms, press the Alarm bell button in the top right cor­ner of the Touch Pilot™ display. A solid gray icon is present during normal operation. The bell icon is red if there is an alarm or alert. A blinking red bell icon indicates that there is an alarm, but the unit is still running. A solid red highlighted bell icon indicates that the unit is shut down due to a detected fault.
CURRENT ALARMS — To access the current alarms view, press the Alarm bell button in the top right corner of the Touch Pilot display, and then select Current Alarms. This screen displays up to 10 current alarms with the time and date as well as a one line description of each alarm. See Table 72 for a list of possible alarms sorted alphabetically by description.
RESETTING ALARMS — The alarms can be reset without stopping the machine. The controller generates two types of alarms. Automatic reset alarms will reset without any interven­tion if the condition that caused the alarm corrects itself. Manu­al reset alarms require the service technician to check for the alarm cause and reset the alarm.
To reset any active alarms, press the Alarm button and then press the Reset Alarms icon . For Alarm Reset on line 1 select Yes and select the Force lightning bolt button . When resetting the alarm manually, the reset can be performed through the Touch Pilot display or remotely through the web interface (Reset Alarms menu).
Only logged-in users can access the Reset Alarms menu. The menu displays up to five alarm codes which are currently active on the unit, corresponding to the first five items dis­played in the Current Alarms menu. Each alarm is also de­scribed by a numeric code. See Tables 73 and 74 for lists of alarms by code.
In the event of a power supply interrupt, the unit restarts automatically without the need for an external command. However, any faults active when the supply is interrupted are saved and may in certain cases prevent a circuit or a unit from restarting.
Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the alarm and correct it. Do not reset the chiller at random without first investigating and correcting the cause(s) of the failure.
ALARM HISTORY — Once the cause of the alarm has been identified and corrected, it will be displayed in the alarm histo­ry. Information regarding resolved alarms is stored in the Alarm history menu, which is divided into 50 recent alarms and 50 recent major alarms. General alarms indicate pumps failure, transducers faults, network connection problems, etc. Major alarms indicate process failure.
To access the Alarm history menu, press the Alarm button and select Alarm Historic or Major Alarm Historic. The 50 most recent alarms of each type are stored in memory, and are replaced on a first-in first-out basis.
Alarms and Alerts —
stantly monitors the unit and generates warnings when abnor-
The integral control system con-
100
Loading...